Agenda packet — Carson City Council, June 17, 2025 (part 3 of 6)

2. Installer: Company specializing in the installation of Work specified in this Section with five year experience.

B. Materials Source: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of quarry tile, grout, and setting materials.

1.5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
A. Prior to start of Work of this section and after approval of submittals, schedule an on-site meeting between CONTRACTOR, Owner, Project Inspector, and representatives of the material manufacturer and tile installer to review construction conditions and Drawings for conformance with the requirements of this Section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s sealed containers, with manufacturer's labels intact.

B. Store materials in clean, dry, and secure areas.

1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide the following in labeled manufacturers’ cartons:

1. Five percent of each type and color of quarry tile installed.

2. Ten linear feet of coved base and bullnose tile for each color installed.

3. Six units of each type and color of corner pieces.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer Warranty:

1. Quarry Tile: Five year material warranty.

2. Waterproofing: Ten year material warranty.

B. Installer: Five year installation warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARRY TILE
A. Standard Grade Products from the following manufacturers conforming to ANSI A137.1:

1. Dal-Tile Corporation.

2. American Olean Company.

3. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

4. Equal.

B. Colors, Textures, Patterns and Sizes: From manufacturer’s standard product line. 90 percent shall be from “price group 2”, and “10 percent from price group 3”, unless indicated otherwise. Quarry tile trim and accessories shall match adjoining quarry tile.

1. Color: Per plans; see material schedule.

2. Tile: Per plans; see material schedule, square edge. Quarry tile sizes specified are modular dimensions unless otherwise indicated.

3. Base: Per plans; see material schedule. Trim shape Q3565, 6-inch by 5-inch by 1/2 inch cove base, round top with integral bull nose or cove forming corners, and related trim pieces.

C. Physical Properties:

1. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) AcuTest: Quarry tile shall have a wet DCOF of 0.42 or greater when tested per Section 9.6 of ANSI A137.1 and ANSI A326.3.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Dimensions, in conformance to ASTM C499.
a. Facial Dimensions: Shall not vary more than ±2.00% from the nominal dimension.
b. Thickness: Maximum range of .050”.

3. Chemical Resistance: Class A Classification, when tested in accordance to ASTM C650.

4. Stain Resistance: 0.30 percent maximum in accordance with ASTM C373.

2.2 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. Conforming to ANSI A118.10, recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated, and compatible with the substrate. Include accessories needed for a complete installation, such as seams and corners. Select waterproofing membrane from the following types:

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Composite polyethylene sheet membrane laminated on both sides. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, Procedure E; maximum 0.36 perms Procedure E.
a. Schluter Systems L.P.; Kerdi.
b. Mapei, Mapeguard WP 200.
c. Noble Company, ValueSeal.
d. Equal.

2. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS- modified-bituminous sheet with woven reinforcement facing; 0.040- inch nominal thickness.
a. National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex. b. Equal.

3. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
a. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
b. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Or equal.
2 .3 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Mortar: Thin set mortar with factory sanded Portland cement mix with manufacturer's standard acrylic latex additive conforming to ANSI A118.4.

For wall applications, provide mortar complying with requirements for non- sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

1. Laticrete 317 Mortar or 253 Gold.

2. Or equal.

B. Epoxy Grout: Two-component epoxy grout conforming to ANSI 118.3. Grout color shall match tile unless otherwise indicated.

1. Custom Building Products, 100% Solids Epoxy Grout.

2. Or equal.

2.4 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS
A. Backer Rod: Polyethylene foam, round, closed-cell, flexible, and compressible conforming to ASTM D1056.

B. Sealant: USDA approved polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920; Type M; Grade P or NS; Class 25; Use T.

C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials.

D. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for bottom of joints too shallow to receive backer rod.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Transitions: Stainless steel ramp trim for transition to resilient flooring of profile and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Joint Sealer: Penetrating Sealer, fungus- and bacteria-resistant, stain- resistant, and slip-resistant, acceptable to quarry tile and grout manufacturers.

1. Aqua Mix Inc.

2. Or Equal.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Cleaner: Neutral phosphate-free cleaner, acceptable to quarry tile and grout manufacturers.

1. Aqua Mix Inc.

2. Or Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING
A. Perform moisture vapor emission rate, relative humidity, and alkalinity testing of concrete slabs per Section 09 0561 Moisture Testing for Flooring Installation.

B. Do not proceed until testing results are satisfactory for flooring installation or after remedial treatment (compatible with) has been applied.

3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with installation requirements. Verify that substrate meet the tolerances specified in the TCNA Handbook.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. Retest areas as required to meet the tolerances specified.

C. Verify that all penetrations through substrate for other trades have been installed. Protect the work of other trades in the area where tile work is to be installed.

D. Remove sealers, coatings, oil, dirt, and dust. Prepare floors before application of waterproofing membrane in accordance with printed instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

E. Proceed with Work only after all conditions are in compliance.

3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Install waterproof membrane according to TCNA Standards and manufacturer’s instructions. Extend membrane up wall mortar or backing board 6 inches minimum above floor.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Verify that joints and cracks in quarry tile substrates are coordinated with caulked-joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust as required by the ARCHITECT.

C. For quarry tile installations other than slab on grade, before setting quarry tile and after seven days curing, water test membrane by damming drains and doors, filling floor with water to 4-inch minimum depth and leaving for 24 hours. Correct any leaks and re-test before proceeding. After testing, protect membrane from traffic until quarry tile Work begins.

D. Substrates to receive wall quarry tile base:

1. Scratch coat of cement plaster, as specified in Section 09 2423 - Cement Plaster and Metal Lath (required in student restrooms, showers and locker rooms, and quarry tile bases).

2. Cementitious backing panels, as specified in Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

E. Do not install quarry tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained in compliance with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces during progress of Work of this section.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE
A. Mix setting mortar in accordance with ANSI recommendations. Install quarry tile over waterproof membrane utilizing "thin-set" method with latex Portland cement bond mortar, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI A108.5. Place quarry tile into fresh mortar press quarry tile to insure full contact. Install quarry tile on floors with 1/4 inch joint width.

B. Install quarry tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining quarry tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Center the quarry tile fields in both directions for each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize quarry tile cutting.

C. Extend Work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.

Terminate Work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of quarry tile without damaging quarry tile. Carefully grind the cut edges of quarry tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit quarry tile closely to SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap quarry tile.

E. Locate joints, directly above joints of concrete substrates, at horizontal and vertical changes in plane, or where indicated during installation of mortar beds. In quarry tile floors, provide at 12 feet on center maximum. Do not saw- cut joints after installing quarry tiles.

F. Prepare and clean joints to be sealed. Apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

G. Conform to manufacturers printed instructions, and applicable requirements of ANSI and TCNA Standards.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALL BASE TILE
A. Install quarry tile over plaster wall brown coat, waterproof membrane, or cementitious backing panels utilizing "thin-set" method with latex Portland cement bond mortar, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI A108.5. Install quarry tile on walls with 1/4 inch joint width. Insure that bond coats do not intrude into joints to be caulked. Cover cure with 40- weight Kraft paper for 72 hours minimum.

B. Top of base shall be level, vertical joints plumb with surfaces true and plumb, and edges of quarry tiles flushed.

C. Rub exposed cuts smooth with a fine stone; no cut edge shall be set against a fixture or adjoining surface without a 1/16 inch joint to be caulked.

3.6 GROUTING
A. Prior to starting, ensure that quarry tile surfaces are clean and excessive bond mortar is scraped and vacuumed from joints. Approximately 2/3 depth of quarry tile should be open for grouting. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for mixing grout. Once grout Work commences, proceed until complete wall or floor area is finished utilizing one batch of grout.

B. Do not dampen quarry tile. Force grout into joints with sufficient pressure on rubber float so as to fill joints completely and scrape excess grout off quarry tile surface with rubber float. Smooth or tool grout to uniform joint finish. Do not allow grout to harden on face of quarry tile.

C. Do not cover floor, but do not allow foot traffic for 72 hours. Then, if grout is not tacky, cover with 40-weight Kraft paper for protection.

3.7 CLEANING AND SEALING
SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Remove and replace cracked, broken or defective Work with proper material.

B. If grout scum is not visible on quarry tile surface after curing, clean quarry tile surface with clear water.

C. If, when curing membrane is removed, grout scum is visible on quarry tile surface, use the following cleaning method:

1. Immediately recover floor with paper or felt and allow to continue curing for a minimum of 14 days; uncover floor and maintain entire quarry tile surface saturated with clean cool water for not less than two hours.

2. Utilize a neutral cleaner acceptable to manufacturers of quarry tile and grout and follow manufacturer’s instruction. Do not provide generic acid cleaners.

3. Wet quarry tile floors and apply cleaning solution to floor surface, then scrub with a brush. Rinse area several times with clean water to flush solution off floor surface.

C. Apply penetrating sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions utilizing a dense sponge applicator, paint pad, sprayer, or brush. Avoid overlapping, puddling, and rundown. Completely wipe surface dry within 3 to 5 minutes using cotton or paper towels; do not allow sealer to dry on quarry tile. After two hours, test surface by applying water droplets to surface. If water is absorbed, apply a second coat. Avoid surface traffic for 24 hours.

3.8 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Insure joints to be sealed are free of setting and grouting materials and construction debris. Do not permit any foot traffic on installed sealants for a minimum of 48 hours or protect with hardboard strips.

B. Install in accordance with Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

3.9 PROTECTION
A. Admit no traffic where quarry tile is installed until mortar and grout has set for a minimum of 72 hours.

B. Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.10 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Lay-in acoustical ceiling systems and metal suspension system.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

3. Division 23 - HVAC.

4. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ceiling systems shall consist of lay-in acoustical ceiling panels by a single manufacturer and suspension systems by a single manufacturer for the entire project.

B. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years’ experience in installing acoustical ceiling systems of the types specified.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class III or C finish:

1. Flame Spread: Less than 200.

2. Smoke Density: Less than 450.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals.

Product Data: Metal grid suspension system components and acoustical panel units.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.

C. Maintenance Materials: Provide extra panels equal to 1 percent of the area of each typical module size of acoustical panel, but not less than 8 of each specified size, style, and color.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in original sealed packages.

B. Store under cover in dry, watertight conditions.

C. Handle in a manner to prevent damage during storage and installation.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Jobsite Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more than 70 percent relative humidity prior to, during, and after installation

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty.

B. Installer shall provide a two year fabrication and installation warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. USG Corporation.

B. Armstrong World Industries.

C. CertainTeed Ceilings Corp.

D. Equal.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Metal suspension system for acoustical lay-in tile shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653. Main beams and cross tees shall be double-web steel construction with exposed flange design, with factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes and integral couplings.

B. Metal suspension system for acoustical lay-in tile shall conform with ASTM C635, C636 and E580 and section 13.5.6 of ASCE 7, as amended by CBC Section 1615A.1.16, for installation in high seismic areas.

C. Structural classification of suspension systems shall be heavy-duty in conformance to ASTM C635.

D. Vertical Strut: USG Donn Compression Post, or equal, or as indicated; types and designs complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and seismic Zones D, E and F requirements. Provide base attachment clip for connection of vertical strut to main beams.

E. Wall Molding: Fabricated from galvanized steel with 2-inch horizontal leg and hemmed edges, same finish as main and cross tees.

F. Spacer/Stabilizer Bars: Provide for tying together the ends of main runners and cross tees that are not attached to wall molding.

G. Hanger Wire: 0.106-inch diameter (0.144-inch diameter for pendant fixtures), galvanized soft annealed mild steel wire as defined in ASTM A641, Class 1 coating.

H. Provide attachment devices and any other required accessories for a complete suspended ceiling system installation.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS
A. Acoustical ceiling panels shall be class A in accordance to ASTM E1264.

B. Acoustical panels shall meet the following surface-burning characteristics when tested in accordance to ASTM E84 for Class A materials:

1. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.

2. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50.

C. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Panels and faces shall be treated with a biocide paint additive or an antimicrobial solution to inhibit mold and mildew.

2.4 CEILING TYPES
A. ACT 1 – Meeting & Storage Room:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels:
a. Panel Name: Armstrong Ultima Lay-In and Tegular
1942HRC, Ultima High NRC, OR equal.
b. Panel Size: 2-foot by 2-foot.
c. Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch.
d. Edge Detail: Beveled tegular 15/16”.
e. Light Reflectance: 0.88 minimum, in accordance with ASTM E1477.
f. CAC: Minimum 35, UL Classified, complying with ASTM E1414.
g. NRC: Minimum 0.75, UL Classified, complying with ASTM C423.
h. Color: White.
i. Recycled Content: 74 percent minimum.

2. Suspension System:
a. Suspension System Name: Silhouette XL by Armstrong, Fineline by USG, 4500 Ultraline Series by Chicago Metallic Corporation, or equal.
b. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips or other supports and struts required to be installed by the Work of other trades that depend on the suspended ceiling system for support.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Coordinate related Work to ensure completion prior to installation of clips or fasteners.

C. Compare layouts with construction conditions. Tile shall be spaced symmetrically about the centerlines of the room or space and shall start with a tile or joint line as required to avoid narrow tiles at the finish edges unless indicated otherwise. Joints shall be tight with joint lines straight and aligned with the walls. Ceiling moldings shall be provided where tile abuts wall with matching caulking to eliminate any space.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the United States Postal Service.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. General:

1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636 and ASTM E580.

2. System shall be complete; with joints neatly and tightly joined and securely fastened; suspension members shall be installed in a true, flat, level plane.

3. Hanger Wires: 0.106 inch diameter minimum; larger sizes as indicated or required.
a. Fasten wires to panel points and structure above per most stringent requirements of fabricator and CBC and as indicated on Drawings.
b. Wires exceeding 1:6 out-of-plumb shall be braced with counter-sloping wires.
c. Maintain wires at least 6 inches from non-braced ducts, pipes, conduits, and other items.
d. Install wire along main runners at 4 feet on center. Terminal ends of each main runner and cross tee must be supported within 8 inches of each wall with a perimeter wire or within one-fourth (1/4) of the length of the end tee, whichever is least, for the perimeter of the ceiling area.
e. Where obstructions prevent direct suspension, provide trapezes or equivalent devices; 1 ½-inch minimum cold rolled channels back-to-back may be installed for spans to 6 feet maximum.
f. Wire shall be straight, without extraneous kinks or bend.

Hanger wire connections must be capable of carrying a 200 - pound pull without stretching or shifting the suspension clip.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Bracing Wires to Resist Seismic Forces: 0.106 inch diameter minimum, larger sizes as indicated or required.
a. System for Bracing Ceilings: Lay-In Ceiling Systems: Install one four-wire set of sway-bracing wires and a vertical strut for each 144 square feet maximum of ceiling area. Locate
wire-sets and struts at 12 feet maximum on center. At ceiling perimeters, wire-sets shall be installed within 6 feet of walls. b. Install four-wire sets and struts within 2 inches of cross-runner intersection with main runner; space wires 90 degrees from each other.
c. Do not install sway bracing wires at an angle greater than 45 degrees with the ceiling plane.
d. Wires shall be tight, without causing ceiling to lift. e. Fasten struts in accordance with CBC requirements.
f. Maintain wires at least 6 inches from non-braced ducts, pipes, conduit, and other items.

5. Provide additional wires, 0.106 inch diameter minimum, necessary to properly support suspension at electrical devices, air distribution devices, vertical soffits, and other concentrated loads.

6. Suspension:
a. Suspension members shall be fastened to two adjacent walls per ASTM 580; but shall be at least 3/4 inches minimum clear of other walls.
b. Any suspension members not fastened to walls shall be interconnected to prevent spreading, near their free end, with a horizontal metal strut or stabilizer bar or 0.064-inch diameter taut tie wire.
c. Provide additional tees or sub-tees to frame openings for lights, air distribution devices, electrical devices, and other items penetrating through ceiling, which do not have an integral flange to support and conceal cut edges of acoustic panels. Provide cross bracing necessary to securely support any surface mounted fixtures or other items.

7. Attachment of Wires:
a. To Metal Deck or Steel Framing Members: Install as required by current code.
b. To Suspension Members: Insert through holes in members or supporting clips.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Wires shall be fastened with three tight turns minimum for hanger wires and four tight turns minimum bracing wires.

Turns shall be made in a 1 ½-inch maximum distance.

B. Suspension System for 2-foot by 2-foot Lay-in Acoustical Ceilings:

1. Main Runners: Install main runners 48 inches apart; 0.106-inch diameter hanger wires space 48 inches on center maximum along runners, and within 8 inches of ends.

2. Install wall moldings with fasteners to studs. Install corner caps at molding intersections.

3. Cross-Tees: Install between main runners in a repetitive pattern of 2-foot spacings.

4. Sub-Tees: Install at edges of penetrations.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Install panels into suspension system. Partial panels shall be neatly cut and fitted to suspension and around penetrations and/or obstructions. Duplicate tegular edges at partial panels; cuts to be straight. Repaint cut tiles to match color or as directed by manufacturer for mylar facing at visually exposed conditions or as required by the Architect.

B. Penetrations through the ceilings for sprinkler heads and other similar devices that are not integgrally tied to the ceiling system in the lateral direction shall have a 2 inch oversized ring, sleeve, or adapter through the ceiling tile to allow free movement of one inch in horizontal directions.

Alternatively per ASTM E580, a flexible sprinkler hose fitting that can accommodate one inch of ceiling movement shall be permitted to be used in lieu of the oversized ring, sleeve, or adapter.

3.4 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Refer to and coordinate with Division 23 - HVAC.

B. Install air distribution grilles and other devices into suspension system.

Install 4 taut wires, each 0.106 inch diameter minimum, to each device within 3 inches of device corners, to support their weight independent of the suspension system.

3.5 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Refer to and coordinate with Division 26 - Electrical.

B. Fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds: Install fixtures into suspension systems and fasten earthquake clips to suspension members. Install minimum 2 slack safety wires, each 0.106-inch diameter minimum, to each fixture at diagonally opposite corners, to support their weight independent of the system.

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
MILLS PARK 09 5113 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Fixtures weighing 56 Pounds or more: Install fixtures into suspension system and fasten earthquake clips to suspension system members as required by the Drawings and/or code. Install not less than 4 taut 0.106-inch diameter wires capable of supporting four times the fixture load.

D. Support pendant-mounted light fixtures directly from the structure above with hanger wires or cables passing through each pendant hanger and capable of supporting two times the weight of the fixture. Brace the pendant- mounted light fixtures by either a bracing assembly at the ceiling penetration or below the ceiling to the walls, as indicated in the drawings.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members.

B. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to eliminate evidence of damage

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 6513

RUBBER BASE
MILLS PARK 09 6513 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Topset coved rubber base for installation with surface flooring.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 09 6519 - Vinyl Composition Tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published technical data describing materials, construction, and recommended installation instructions. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material.

B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance, care, and cleaning of base.

C. Samples: Submit Samples of top set base in each available color. Following color selections, submit Samples, not less than 12 inches long of each selected color and type. Submit pint cans of each type of adhesive.

D. Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver at least 50 lineal feet and five outside corner units of each color of rubber base installed. Deliver the materials in unopened factory containers or in sealed cartons with labels identifying the contents, matching installed materials.

Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years’ experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials.

B. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM F1861: Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

3. Comply with current CHPS requirements, www.chps.net.

4. Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, adhesives, etc. must be approved by Owner’s Office of
Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS).

5. Each selected color and configuration shall be from same dye lot and color.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer’s packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name. Store materials at room temperature, but not less than 70 degrees F, for a minimum of 48 hours before installation, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s printed instructions.

SECTION 09 6513

RUBBER BASE
MILLS PARK 09 6513 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive rubber base are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for site installation conditions.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a five-year material warranty.

B. Installer shall provide a two-year fabrication and installation warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Burke/Mercer Wall Base.

B. Roppe, Pinnacle Rubber Base.

C. Flexco Company, Wallflower Premium Rubber Wall Base.

D. Johnsonite.

E. Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Rubber base: Conform to ASTM F 861; Group 2, solid (homogeneous); Type 1, TS, (thermoset) vulcanized rubber, Style A, 4-inch high unless otherwise indicated, integral colors as selected, non-shrinking, 1/8-inch- thick, with matching molded outside corners.

B. Base Adhesive: Water based, low odor type, as recommended by manufacturer of rubber base.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work of this section with other sections to provide a level, smooth and clean finish surfaces to receive rubber base.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Field verify dimensions and other conditions affecting the Work of this section before commencing the Work of this section.

B. Before Work is started, examine surfaces that are to receive rubber base.

Deficiencies shall be corrected before starting the Work of this section.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Do not start preparation until adjacent concrete floor slabs are at least 90 days old and finished flooring is installed.

B. Install rubber base when ambient temperature is 70 degrees °F or higher.

SECTION 09 6513

RUBBER BASE
MILLS PARK 09 6513 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install top set base at hard floors, including resilient flooring, concrete and wood, carpet, and other soft floors.

B. Securely fasten cement base to backing in long lengths in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Lay out lengths so that not less than 18 inches long filler pieces are provided. Assure that top and toe continuously contact the wall and floor, and that all joints are tight. Install matching factory formed external corners at all offsets. Inside corners shall be coped; wrapped corners are not acceptable.

C. Use of adhesive gun is prohibited. Apply adhesive directly to substrate using the appropriate notched trowel or spreader according to manufacturer’s instructions. Maintain 1/8-inch gap from top of base to prevent adhesive oozing onto adjacent surfaces.

D. Base and outside corners shall be rolled with a seam roller before adhesive sets.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Maintain surfaces of base clean as installation progresses. Clean rubber base when sufficiently seated and remove foreign substances.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces of adhesive or other defacement. Replace damaged and/or defective Work to the specified condition.

3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 6519

LUXURY VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
MILLS PARK 09 6519 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Vinyl composition tile flooring as indicated.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements.

2. Section 06 2000 – Finish Carpentry.

3. Section 09 0565 – Moisture Testing for Flooring Installation.

4. Section 09 6513 – Rubber Base.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Pop-up: A pop-up is defined as any surface deviation or looseness of substrate that is equal to or greater than 1/64 (0.015625) inch above the concrete floor level, regardless of the size.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published technical data describing materials, construction, and recommended installation instructions. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material.

Submit list and Product Data of recommended finish materials.

B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance, care, and cleaning of vinyl composition tile.

C. Samples: Submit Samples of vinyl composition tile and any reducers or transitions in each available color and pattern. Following color selections, submit full size samples of each selected color and pattern. Submit pint cans of each type of adhesive.

D. Maintenance Materials: Before Substantial Completion, deliver one unopened container of each color and pattern of vinyl composition tile in each color and pattern installed. Label each container indicating locations installed. Include unopened cans of adhesives adequate to install the maintenance materials.

E. Installer’s Experience Qualifications: Submit list of not less than five projects, extending over period of not less than five years, indicating installer’s experience record. Submit letter from manufacturer indicating manufacturer's approval for installer of the products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum five years’ experience in successfully installing the same or similar flooring materials.

B. Qualifications of Supervising Installer: In addition to the qualifications of the installer listed above, the flooring installer’s supervisor shall have a minimum of 10 hours Cal-OSHA safety training.

SECTION 09 6519

LUXURY VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
MILLS PARK 09 6519 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Pre-Installation and Progress meetings: Prior to start of work of this section and after approval of submittals, schedule on-site meetings between Contractor, Supervising Installer, Owner, and Project Inspector to review installation and procedures required for project.

D. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. Materials shall be compliant with requirements of CBC Chapter 11B and ADAAG.

2. ASTM E84: Class A Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less.

3. Comply with current CHPS requirements, www.chps.net.

4. Moisture Testing: ASTM F1869.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer’s packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name.

B. Materials shall be stored at room temperature, but not less than 70 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before installation, unless manufacturer’s instructions specify otherwise.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive new flooring are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials. Verify that areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for Project site installation conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a five-year material warranty.

B. Installer shall provide a two-year fabrication and installation warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong Contract Interiors.

B. Mannington Commercial.

C. Congoleum, standard grade as manufactured by Mohawk.

D. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Luxury Vinyl Composition Tile: Conform to ASTM F1066, Composition 1, asbestos free, Class 2 (through pattern), 9-inch by 48-inch by minimum 1/8- inch-thick, colors and patterns as indicated on Drawings.

1. Tile shall be from same batch and run number for each color.

B. Crack Filler and Leveling Compound: 100 percent cementitious binder type (as defined by ASTM C150), shall be approved by Owner’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS). The following manufacturers are currently listed approved by OEHS:

SECTION 09 6519

LUXURY VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
MILLS PARK 09 6519 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Webcrete #95 as manufactured by Durabond.

2. Ardex SD-F.

3. Armstrong S183 or S184.

4. Equal, as recommended by flooring manufacturer and approved by OEHS.

5. Leveling Compound shall meet or exceed 200 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1583.

C. Concrete Primer: Non-staining type recommended by manufacturer of vinyl composition tile. Concrete primer shall be OEHS approved.

D. Adhesive: Water based; low odor type formulated specially for installation with vinyl composition tile and recommended by manufacturer.

E. Reducer Strips: Tapered rubber not less than one inch wide, and thickness to match tile.

F. Floor Finish: One of the following systems:

1. Neutral cleaner, Robusto, seal Hil-Tex and finish Explorer, manufactured by Hillyard.

2. Neutral cleaner, ACT sealer and Super Polymer 85 finish, manufactured by Maintex.

3. Sundance cleaner and Butcher’s Mainstay floor finish, manufactured by Waxie Stationary Supply.

4. Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with related Work to assure level, dry, smooth, and clean finish surfaces to receive vinyl composition floor tile.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Field verify and correct all deficiencies of conditions affecting Work before commencing Work of this section.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF TILE
A. Color and pattern: Install tiles in the pattern indicated on Drawings. If no pattern is indicated, tiles shall be installed in a rectangular pattern, in one color.

B. Install vinyl composition floor tile when ambient temperature is 70 degrees F or higher or manufacturer’s range.

C. Install the tile adhesive in a thin film evenly with a notched trowel. Trowel notches shall be as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

1. Mix adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

SECTION 09 6519

LUXURY VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
MILLS PARK 09 6519 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Install adhesive only in area that can be covered by flooring material within the adhesive manufacture’s recommended working time. Do not set tile into wet adhesive.

3. Tile must be set into dry, but still tacky, adhesive film. Remove adhesive that has dried beyond recommended time or has filmed over and is no longer tacky.

4. Adhesive application rate shall be as required to avoid telegraphing trowel lines to the surface after maintenance coatings are applied.

Adjust tile runoff during installation if necessary.

5. Immediately remove any excess adhesive from the tile surface using the adhesive manufacturer’s recommended cleaner and a damp, not wet, cloth.

D. Provide reducer where floor covering edges are exposed, such as at center of the door or where floor coverings terminate.

E. Install tiles symmetrically about centerlines of areas progressing toward walls. Adjust border tiles as required. Tiles shall be straight and joints close.

Tile shall be cut to fit snugly at doorframes, and walls. No slivers at edges.

F. Mechanically cut flooring material to produce square true edges.

G. As floor tile is installed and within adhesive’s recommended working time, roll with a clean, smooth, 100-pound roller in both directions. As the rolling proceeds, replace any loosened, defective, or damaged tile with new and finish to the specified condition.

H. Remove dust, debris, and soil with any combination of sweeping, micro- fiber dust-mopping with a properly treated, non-oily mop and vacuuming.

3.4 CLEANING, WAXING, AND COMPLETION
A. Maintain flooring surfaces clean as installation progresses.

B. Use a sprayer to mist the area to be cleaned with a neutral cleaning solution prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Gently scrub the floor using red or maroon cleaning, not stripping pads, mounted on a single disc, 175 RPM floor machine; or preferably, with a machine that uses horizontally mounted brushes with a counter-rotating spindle motion. Never allow the machine to remain running stationary.

D. Remove the resulting slurry with a wet vacuum.

E. Rinse the floor at least four times, each time using a clean mop and clean rinse water. On the first rinse, apply just enough water to keep the floor wet until the solution is picked-up with a vacuum. The next two rinses should be with a well wrung-out, damp mop. The final rinse should produce clean rinse water. Ensure the rinse water is clean throughout the rinsing process. Avoid tracking the floor after the final rinse. Check the floor after the final rinse for any missed areas and re-scrub/rinse as needed. Repeat the rinsing process until all signs of the cleaning solution are removed and the floor shows no sign of haziness or dusting when dry. If the Contractor has lightweight “automatic” floor machines capable of achieving the same result as SECTION 09 6519

LUXURY VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
MILLS PARK 09 6519 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
described above, they may be used in-place of this method. Do not flood or excessively dampen floor at any time.

F. Allow the Work to dry thoroughly.

G. Finish vinyl composition tile with two coats of sealer, and four coats of finish (wax) applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. Each coat shall dry for a time recommended by the manufacturer. The last coat of floor wax shall be burnished in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Take care not to allow any foreign material, including dust and mop fibers to become embedded in any coat of wet sealer or finish.

H. After the last coat of floor finish has dried sufficiently according to the manufacturer’s instructions, burnish work, using high speed equipment, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions to bring the entire surface, including the corners and edges, to high level of luster, free of marks and dust embedded in finish
I. Clean adjacent baseboard and other surfaces of adhesive and other materials. Replace damaged or defective Work to the specified condition.

3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates listed in part, 3.6 Exterior Painting Schedule.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

2. Section 09 9300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

H. EG: Ethylene Glycol. Ethylene glycol is listed as a hazardous air pollutant (HAP) by the U.S. EPA.

I. Blocking: Two painted surfaces sticking together such as a painted door sticking to a painted jamb.

SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. RAVOC: Reactivity adjusted VOC ‘Reactivity’ means the ability of a VOC to promote ozone formation.

K. PDCA: Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.org L. SSPC: Scopes of SSPC Surface Preparation Standards and Specifications. www.sspc.org.

M. Green Wise: Green Wise products are tested in an ISO accredited laboratory to meet environmentally determined performance standards established by Coatings Research Group, Inc.

N. Dunn-Edwards Conformance Chart: DE CONFORMANCE TABLE

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, no smaller than 7 inches by 10 inches (177.8 mm by 254 mm) or larger than 8.5 inches by 11 inches (215.9 mm by 279.4 mm).

2. Label each Sample for project, architect, general contractor, painting contractor, paint color name and number, paint brand name, "P" number if applicable, and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.

Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: Provide not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
applied.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) or more than 120 degrees F (49 degrees C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Painting contractor should follow proper painting practices and exercise judgment based on his or her experience and project specific conditions as to when to proceed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide products listed from Dunn-Edwards Corporation OR Equal.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colorants: The use of colorants containing hazardous chemicals, such as ethylene glycol, is prohibited.

D. Colors: As selected by the Architect.

1. Indicate a percentage of the surface area that will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site.

SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements.

Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials.

Contractor will comply with requirements to use compatible products and systems as described in Paragraph 2.2.A. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured, including pH testing to determine that alkalinity is within limits established by the manufacturer.

D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color, and to produce satisfactory finish results.

3. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted.

4. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

5. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

6. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.

7. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

8. Priming may not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required ensuring an even primed surface before applying finish coat.

B. Tint each undercoat to a lighter shade of the finish coat (not to exceed 2 ounces of colorant) to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Block Fillers: Provide block fill as scheduled to conform to the following: PDCA Standard P12-05.

1. Level 3 - Premium fill: One or multiple coats of high performance block filler manufactured to be applied at a high dry film build. Block filler shall be back-rolled to eliminate voids and reduce the majority of SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
the masonry profile depth.

F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Other items as directed by the Architect.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9113 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Concrete Substrates, Masonry, Clay, Stucco, Non-Traffic Surfaces:

1. Premium Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, waterbased, interior/exterior, Dunn-Edwards, Eff-Stop Select ESSL00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartashield SSHL50 100% acrylic, (Gloss Level 5).

B. Non-Ferrous Metal Substrates:

1. Premium Latex System:
a. Pre-Treatment: Waterbased, Krud Kutter, Metal Clean & Etch SCME-01
b. Prime Coat: Primer, waterbased, interior/exterior, Dunn-Edwards, Ultrashield Galvanized Metal Primer ULGM00.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartashield SSHL50 100% acrylic, (Gloss Level 5).

C. Wood Substrates:

1. Premium Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, waterbased, exterior, Dunn-Edwards, Ultra- Grip Premium UGPR00 or EZ-Prime Premium EZPR00
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartashield SSHL50 100% acrylic, (Gloss Level 5).

2. Acrylic Flat Paint system:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, waterbased, exterior, Dunn-Edwards, EZ- Prime Premium EZPR00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Acrylic, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Acrylic, exterior, flat, Dunn-Edwards, Acri-Hues ACHS10 100% acrylic, (flat).

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates listed in 3.6 Interior Painting Schedule.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 2900 "Gyp Board" for surface preparation and the application of paint finishes.

2. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 1 to 2 units at 85 degrees.

B. Gloss Level 2: 5 to 9 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 15 units at 85 degrees.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 15 units at 60 degrees and 15 to 30 units at 85 degrees.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and 35 to 50 units at 85 degrees.

E. Gloss Level 5: 40 to 50 units at 60 degrees.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 80 units at 60 degrees.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 80 units at 60 degrees.

H. Blocking: Two painted surfaces sticking together such as a painted door sticking to a painted jamb.

I. Mildew Resistant: Certified products are specially formulated with microbicidal additives that resist mold, mildew, and algae growth on the paint film and inhibit growth of bacterial odors.

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. CHPS: Collaborative for High Performance Schools. A national movement to improve student performance and the entire educational experience by building the best possible schools. www.chps.net.

K. EG: Ethylene Glycol. Ethylene glycol is listed as a hazardous air pollutant (HAP) by the U.S. EPA.

L. PDCA: Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.org .

M. RAVOC: Reactivity adjusted VOC. "Reactivity" means the ability of a VOC to promote ozone formation
N. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings publishes Scopes of SSPC Surface Preparation Standards and Specifications www.sspc.org .

O. Dunn-Edwards Conformance Chart: D-E CONFORMANCE TABLE

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. LEED v.4 Requirements: Interior paints and coatings must pass CDPH Standard Method V1.1 (also called section 01350) emissions testing; and they must comply with the VOC content limits of the California ARB 2007 Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, no smaller than 7 inches X 10 inches (177 mm X 254 mm) or larger than 8.5 inches X 11 inches (216 mm X 280 mm).

2. Label each Sample for project, architect, general contractor, painting contractor, paint color name and number, paint brand name, "P" number if applicable, and application area.

E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: Provide not less than 1 gal. (3.8L) of each material and color applied.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Painting contractor should follow proper painting practices and exercise judgment based on his or her experience and project specific conditions as to when to proceed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide products listed from the Dunn-Edwards Corporation OR equal.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide material that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colorants: The use of colorants containing hazardous chemicals, such as ethylene glycol, is prohibited and zero VOC colorants should be used whenever possible.

D. Colors: As selected by the Architect.

1. Indicate a percentage of surface area which will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will comply with requirements to use compatible products and systems as described in Article 2.2. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

2. Wood: 15 percent.

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smoothly.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured, including pH testing to determine that alkalinity is within limits established by the manufacturer.

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat to a lighter shade of the finish coat (not to exceed 2 ounces of colorant) to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Block Fillers: Provide block fill as scheduled to conform to the following PDCA Standard P12-05:

1. Level 3 - Premium Fill: One or multiple coats of high performance block filler manufactured to be applied at a high dry film build. Block filler shall be back-rolled to eliminate voids and reduce the majority of the masonry profile depth.

F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
i. Other items as directed by the architect.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by the Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Premium Low Odor / Zero VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, Dunn-Edwards, Vinylastic Select VNSL00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, Dunn-Edwards, Spartazero SZRO10, (Gloss Level 1).

Or
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartawall SWLL50, (Gloss Level 5).

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Premium Low Odor / Zero VOC Latex System:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, Dunn-Edwards, Smooth Blocfil Select SBSL00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartawall SWLL50, (Gloss Level 5).

C. Ferrous Metal Substrates:

1. Premium Low Odor / Zero VOC Latex over a Waterborne Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, Dunn-Edwards, Bloc-Rust Premium BRPR00 Series or Enduraprime rust preventative primer ENPR00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartawall SWLL50, (Gloss Level 5).

D. Non-Ferrous Metal Substrates:

1. Premium Low Odor / Zero VOC Latex System:
a. Pre-Treatment: Waterbased, Krud Kutter, Metal Clean & Etch SCME- 01 b. Prime Coat: Primer, waterbased, Dunn-Edwards, Ultrashield Galvanized Metal Primer ULGM00.

SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
MILLS PARK 09 9123 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartawall SWLL50, (Gloss Level 5).

E. Wood Substrates:

1. Premium Low Odor / Zero VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, acrylic, for interior wood, Dunn-Edwards, Ultra- Grip Select UGSL00 or Dunn-Edwards, Inter-Kote IKPR00. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, Dunn-Edwards, Spartawall SWLL50, (Gloss Level 5).

2. Acrylic Flat Paint system:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, waterbased, interior, Dunn-Edwards, EZ-Prime Premium EZPR00.
b. Intermediate Coat: Acrylic, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Acrylic, interior, flat, Dunn-Edwards, Acri-Hues ACHS10 100% acrylic, (flat).

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and field apply the Non-sacrificial Anti-Graffiti coating as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified.

B. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturers’ representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City.

C. Related Documents.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. Low- sheen refers to a finish with a gloss range between 30 and 40 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

B. General: Standard anti-graffiti properties defined in ASTM D 6578 apply to this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit three (3) sets of a typewritten list of each component of the coating system as specified to the Engineer within twenty-one (21) days after award of contract. This list shall give the name, catalog number, and manufacturer, and shall be accompanied by cut sheets or reproductions of catalog pages for all of the equipment and material to be installed. The submittal shall include a manufacturer’s certification that all products supplied comply with the requirements indicated that limit the amount of VOCs in coating products.

B. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Specifications only indicate the quality and workmanship to be performed rather than a detailed description of the performance of the work. Install said site components, materials and equipment in a functional manner and in which they were intended in the drawings.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed anti-graffiti coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

D. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each substrate required.

E. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. Architect will select one area or surface of each different substrate to represent surfaces and conditions for application. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m), or as directed by Architect, of wall surface for each different substrate.

F. Apply coatings to each surface as specified. Provide the required sheen of each surface.

G. After finishes are accepted, City Engineer will use the surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

H. Final approval of coatings will be from benchmark samples.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements.

J. In the event of any discrepancies between the Plans and the Specifications, the final decision as to which will be followed shall be made by the Engineer, or his designated representative. In the event the installation is contradictory to the direction of the Engineer, the installation shall be rectified by the Contractor at no additional cost to City.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information:

Name or title of material.

Product description (generic classification or binder type).

Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

Contents by volume, for vehicle constituents.

Thinning instructions.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Application instructions.

Handling instructions and precautions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a temperature range between 40 and 95 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly.

Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 85 deg F.

B. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit coatings to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

C. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for more than 28 days. Rain is not predicted within 24 hours. Application proceeds more than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

D. Windy conditions do not exist that may cause anti-graffiti coatings to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.

E. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

F. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain graffiti repellency within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL & MANUFACTURERS
A. Whenever a material or process is delineated or specified by patent, proprietary name or process, or manufacturer’s name, such specifications are used for the purpose of facilitating the description of material or process desired. Approved equals are acceptable.

B. Information pertaining to the product as to the manufacturer, material, model, color, finish, etc. is shown on the plan.

2.2 GENERAL MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various anti- graffiti coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

D. VOC Classification: Provide anti-graffiti coating materials, including primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 100 g/L or less
SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.3 EXTERIOR ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEMS
A. Provide the following 3 coat application over exterior cast-in-place concrete; concrete and brick masonry vertical surfaces; and where indicated per plans:
a. Primer: Acrylic/Silicon UV stable bonding primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. SCS-002SP Sealer Prime Waterborne Sealer; Seicoat
Corporation 323-263-4575 www.seicoat.com.
b. Intermediate Coat: One component nanotechnological anti-graffiti coating applied at spread rate recommended by manufacturer to a dry film thickness of 1.0. Product must be a Level 1 Antigraffiti coating as specified by ASTM D6578.

1. GPA-300 Graffiti Proofer; Seicoat Corporation 323-263-4575 c. Finish Coat: One component nanotechnological anti-graffiti coating applied at a spread rate recommended by manufacturer to a thickness of 2.0 mils. Product must be a Level 1 Antigraffiti coating as specified by ASTM D6578.

1. GPA-300 Graffiti Proofer; Seicoat Corporation 323-263-4575 Product must meet Anti-graffiti test defined in ASTM D 6578.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that layout and site are compatible.

C. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which anti-graffiti coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application requirements.

D. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry.

E. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area.

F. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item; provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

B. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

C. Cleaning: Before applying anti-graffiti coatings, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

D. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.

F. Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cast stone surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces.

G. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer.

H. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

K. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
L. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using.

M. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

N. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of coating system components.

O. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of components being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.

P. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply anti-graffiti coatings until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving coatings have been installed and cured.

Q. Anti-graffiti coating work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, anti-graffiti coatings, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work.

R. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of anti-graffiti coatings and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B. General: Apply anti-graffiti coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.

Do not apply anti-graffiti coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. Coating surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.

The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

E. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

F. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method.

G. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.

H. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

I. Application Procedures: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating as permitted by manufacturers written instructions and governing regulations.

K. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

L. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

M. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

N. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated by others.

O. Recoat primed and sealed substrates immediately if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing.

P. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for shade and coverage.

Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.

SECTION 09 9623

NON-SACRIFICIAL ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
MILLS PARK 09 9623 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately clean anti-graffiti coatings from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Supply and installation of Interior Room Signs, and Geometric Signs.

B. Related Sections:

1. Project Signs, see Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls:

Section 01 5000, Temporary Facilities Control.

2. Division 9, Finishes

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with section 01 3300.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing sizes of signs and lettering, construction details of signs and anchoring details.

C. Submittals: Submit color and texture samples of all materials to be used for signs.

D. Samples: Submit 1 full size sample of each toilet room signs.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers shall have been regularly engaged in manufacturing identifying devices for minimum of 5 years.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Notify City when signs are ready for installation. Arrange for conference at site. Do not proceed with installation until ARCHITECT’S approval of specific locations and methods of attachment has been obtained.

C. Provide signs from one manufacturer.

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Use all means necessary to protect signs before, during and after installation. In event of damage, immediately make necessary repairs and replacements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURE
A. Products of following manufacturers are acceptable and are the basis for intended design and quality.

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Vomar Products Inc.

2. ASI-Modulex, Inc.

3. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc.

4. Accent Signage Systems.

5. The Gruenke Company.

6. Ada Sign Products.

7. AccuBraille.

8. Equal.

2.2 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION
A. Interior Room Identification Sign Materials:

1. Substrate Panel: 1/8 inch minimum thick, integrally colored, or clear acrylic plastic, or laminated acrylic. Conforming to ASTM D4802; non- glare (matte), UV stable, suitable for interior and exterior use. a. Corners shall be square.
b. Edges shall be square and eased.
c. Colors as selected by ARCHITECT from manufacturer’s
custom color range.

2. Fasteners:
a. Stainless steel tamper-proof screws and plastic anchors. b. Signs mounted on fire-rated doors shall be secured with adhesive.
c. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the limits for VOC content.

B. Characters and Symbols: Shall be fabricated by one of the processes described below:

1. Computer cut raised characters and graphics shall be cut from 1/16 inch integrally colored acrylic. Raised characters and graphics shall be inlaid 1/32 inch minimum into first surface of sign background, secured with adhesive so it cannot be removed without the use of tools. Raised characters and graphics shall have beveled, eased, or rounded edges.

Non-tactile text and graphics shall be applied to the second surface, and background color shall be applied to the second surface and protected with SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
film or an additional backplate. Pictograms and other symbols including the International Symbol of Accessibility, which are included on signs with raised characters and Braille, are not required to be raised.

2. Raised characters and graphics including braille shall be integral to sign face and shall be formed into sign face by high pressure thermoforming using a negative mold. No applied, glued, welded tactile elements are acceptable. Raised characters and graphics shall have beveled, eased, or rounded edges. No sharp, square edges are acceptable. Non-tactile text and graphics shall be applied to the second surface, and background color shall be applied to the second surface and protected with vinyl film. Pictograms and other symbols including the International Symbol of Accessibility, which are included on signs with raised characters and Braille, or other signs are not required to be raised.

2.3 COMMUNICATION ELEMENTS AND FEATURES
A. Raised Characters Raised characters shall comply with CBC 11B-703.2.

1. Character Type: Characters on signs shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum above their background and shall be sans serif uppercase characters duplicated in Braille. Characters and Braille shall be in a horizontal format.

2. Character Height: Character height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be 5/8 inch minimum and 2-inch maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”.

3. Character Proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the letter “I”.

4. Stroke Thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 15 percent maximum of the height of the character.

5. Character and Line Spacing shall be in conformance to CBC 11B- 703.2.7 and 11B-703.2.8.

6. Character Placement: Shall be placed in accordance to Section 2.3, C below.

A. Visual Characters: Visual characters shall comply with CBC Section 11B- 703.5. Characters shall be conventional in form and shall be uppercase or lowercase or a combination of both, as indicated on the drawings.

Characters shall not be italic, oblique, highly decorative, or of other unusual forms.

1. Finish and Contrast: Characters and their backgrounds shall have a non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their background with either light characters on a dark background or a dark character on a light background.

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Character Proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the uppercase of the letter “I”.

3. Character Height: Minimum character height shall comply with CBC Table 11B-703.5.5.

4. Height from Finish Floor or Ground: Visual characters shall be 40 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground

5. Stroke Thickness: Uppercase letter “I” shall be 10 percent minimum and 20 percent maximum of the height of the character.

6. Character and Line Spacing: Shall be in accordance to CBC 11B- 703.5.8 and 11B-703.5.9.

B. Braille: Contracted Grade 2 Braille, conforming to CBC 11B-703.3. Braille characters shall be inlaid optically correct acrylic Raster beads into computer drilled holes in the panel surface.

1. Dimensions and Capitalization: Braille dots shall have a domed or rounded shape and shall comply with CBC Table 11B-703.3.1. The indication of an uppercase letter or letters shall only be used before the first word of sentences, proper nouns and names, individual letters of the alphabet, initials, and acronyms.

2. Position: Braille shall be positioned below the corresponding text in a horizontal format, flush left or centered. If text is multi-lined, Braille shall be placed below the entire line of text. Braille shall be separated 3/8 inch minimum and 1/2 maximum from any other tactile characters and 3/8 inch minimum from raised borders and decorative elements.

C. Pictograms: In conformance to CBC 11B-703.6. Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum. Characters and Braille shall not be in the pictogram field.

1. Finish and Contrast: Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish. Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field.

2. Text Descriptors: Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field, and shall comply with CBC 11B- 703.2, 11B-703.3 and 11B-703.4.

D. International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA): Shall comply with CBC 11B- 703.7 and CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.1. The ISA shall consist of a white figure on a blue background. The blue color shall be approximate to FS. 15090 in Federal Standard 595C.

E. Mounting Locations and Height: Signs with tactile characters shall be as indicated on the drawings and in conformance to CBC 11B-703.4.

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Mounting Locations:
a. Identification signs for rooms and spaces shall be located on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, as one enters the room or space.
b. Signs that identify exits shall be located at the exit door when approached in the direction of egress travel.
c. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space 18-inches minimum by 18-inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45-degree open position.
d. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side.
e. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located at the inactive leaf.
f. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right-hand door.
g. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall.

2. Mounting height above finish floor or ground: Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest line of raised characters.

2.4 RESTROOM SIGNAGE
A. Multiple-Occupancy restrooms shall be provided with geometric symbols and wall mounted pictograms with text descriptors.

B. Geometric Symbols:

1. Doorways leading to toilet rooms shall be identified by a geometric symbol complying with CBC Section 11B-703.7.2.6.

2. Male Restroom Door Symbol: 1/4-inch-thick equilateral triangle with edges 12 inches long, with vertex pointing upward, the triangle symbol shall contrast with the door, either light on a dark background or dark on a light background. A male silhouette shall appear within the equilateral triangle in contrasting color to it.

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Female Restroom Door Sign: 1/4-inch-thick circle 12-inch diameter, the circle symbol shall contrast with the door, either light on a dark background or dark on a light background. A female silhouette shall appear within the circle in contrasting color to it.

4. “All Gender” Restroom Door Sign (Single occupancy restrooms): 1/4- inch-thick circle, 12-inch diameter with a 1/4-inch-thick equilateral triangle with the vertex pointing upward superimposed on the circle and within the 12-inch diameter. Triangle and circle shall be of contrasting colors; the circle symbol shall contrast with the door. A female and male silhouette shall appear within the equilateral triangle in contrasting color to it, and the word “restroom” shall appear on the bottom part of the circle in contrasting color to it.

5. Edges and Vertices on Geometric Symbols: Shall be eased or rounded at 1/16 inch minimum or chamfered at 1/8 inch maximum.

Vertices shall be radiused between 1/8 minimum and ¼ inch maximum.

6. Location and Mounting Height: Symbols shall be mounted at 58 inches minimum and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface measured from the centerline of the symbol. Where a door is provided the symbol shall be mounted within one inch of the vertical centerline of the door.

C. Room Identification for Multiple-Occupancy Restrooms: Provide a 16-inch- long by 6-inch-tall room identification sign, including a pictogram of the International Symbol of Accessibility on the side. Restroom names shall be “Women” or “Men.” Characters, Braille, pictograms and mounting locations and height shall be in conformance to section 2.3.

D. Room Identification for Single-Occupancy Restrooms: Provide a 16-inch- long by 6-inch-tall room identification sign, including a pictogram of the International Symbol of Accessibility on the side. Text descriptor shall be “All Gender Restroom.” Characters, Braille, pictograms and mounting locations and height shall be in conformance to section 2.3.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interior Identification Signs and Interior Directional Signs:

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE
MILLS PARK 10 1400 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Anchor signs to wall using 4 tamperproof, round head screws, one at each corne
r of sign. Furnish plastic anchors.

2. In In addition to screws, signs shall be secured to wall with high-bond two-faced tape.

3. For installation on glass, fasten sign to glass with extremely high bond double faced tape. On opposite side of glass, anchor matching backplate to glass with very high-bond double-faced tape.

C. Geometric Signs: Toilet room signs shall be anchored to doors with 3 tamperproof countersunk screws, designed for anchoring to material of wall.

3.3 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

Payment for items of work covered under Division 10 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule.

No additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 2115

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
MILLS PARK 10 2115 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Solid phenolic toilet compartments, urinal screens, hardware, and vision screens.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements.

2. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.

3. Section 10 2813 – Toilet Accessories.

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Compartments: Floor supported overhead braced type units consisting of solid phenolic pilasters, panels, and doors; plated steel leveling devices with stainless steel covers; and stainless-steel fittings, hardware, and fastenings.

B. Urinal Screens: Floor supported, and wall hung type supported consisting of solid phenolic screen panels and plated steel leveling devices with stainless steel covers, stainless steel fittings and fastening.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data sheets for each product specified.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings for each product specified, including the following:
a. Plans, elevations, details of construction and attachment to adjacent construction.
b. Show anchorage locations and accessory items.
c. Verify dimensions with field measurements prior to final production of toilet compartments.

3. Material Samples:
a. Submit full range of Samples of phenolic chips for initial color selection. Chips shall be at least 2-inch by 3-inch.
b. Submit Samples of hardware and fasteners.

4. Closeout documents: Submit operation and maintenance data and warranty.

SECTION 10 2115

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
MILLS PARK 10 2115 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

2. ASTM E-84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. Chemical Resistance: Panels to meet or exceed Scientific Equipment Furniture Association’s (S.E.F.A.) list of 49 standard chemicals.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Toilet Compartment Manufacturer shall provide a 25-year material warranty for solid phenolic panels and hardware.

PART 2 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

2. Capitol Partitions.

3. Comtec Industries.

4. Metpar Corporation.

5. Scranton Products.

6. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stiles, Panels, Doors, and Screens

1. Solid phenolic material constructed of solidly fused plastic laminate with matte-finish melamine surfaces, colored face sheets, and black phenolic resin core that are integrally bonded. Edges shall be black.

2. Color: as noted on Drawings.

3. Option to provide gap-Free Privacy Design.

4. Finish Thickness:
a. Stiles and doors shall be 3/4 inch.
b. Panels shall be 1/2 inch.

SECTION 10 2115

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
MILLS PARK 10 2115 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Heavy Duty Hardware

1. All hardware to be Institutional Hardware, 18-8, type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.

2. All hardware concealed inside compartments with the exception of out- swinging doors.

C. Latch with Vandal-Resistant Option

1. Sliding door latch 14 gauge and slide on nylon track.

2. Sliding door latch shall require less than 5-pound force to operate. Twisting latch operation will not be acceptable.

3. Latch track attached to door by flathead machine screws into factory installed threaded brass inserts.

4. Latch handle shall have rubber bumper to act as door stop.

5. Latch shall allow door to be lifted over 8-gauge keeper for emergency access.

6. Metal-to-metal connection shall withstand a direct pull of over 1000 pounds per screw.

7. ADA approved latch.

D. Hinges with Vandal-Resistant Option

1. Hinge 16-gauge continuous piano hinge.

2. All doors equipped with self-closing hinge.

3. Continuous piano hinge attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, one- way, stainless steel machine screws into threaded brass inserts.

4. Door furnished with two 11-gauge vinyl-coated door stops to resist door from being kicked out of compartment.

5. Door stops and keeper secured with stainless steel, one-way, machine screws from inside of compartment to threaded brass inserts.

E. Mounting brackets 18-gauge stainless steel and extend full height of panel. U- channels furnished for panel to stile mounting. Angle brackets furnished for stile to wall and stile to panel mounting. Angle brackets furnished for panel to wall mounting.

F. Leveling Device 3/16 inch hot rolled steel bar; chromate-treated and zinc-plated; through-bolted to base of solid phenolic stile.

G. Stile Shoe one-piece, 4 inch high, type-304, 22-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Top shall have 90 degree return to stile. One-piece shoe capable of adapting to 3/4 inch or 1 inch stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line.

H. Overhead Braced Headrail satin finish, extruded anodized aluminum 0.125 inches thick with anti-grip profile.

SECTION 10 2115

TOILET COMPARTMENTS
MILLS PARK 10 2115 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 – Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

1. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls, and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.

2. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of compartments.

3. Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations for backing and proper support.

C. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.

D. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation.

B. Set hinge cam on in-swinging doors to hold doors open when unlatched.

C. Set hinge cam on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position.

D. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet for wall protection and decoration

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
B. National Building Code of Canada (NBC)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
F. Underwriters Laboratory of Canada (ULC)
G. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet systems that conform to the following requirements of regulatory agencies and the quality control of IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems™, InPro Corporation.

1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide UL Classified Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet conforming with the NFPA Class A fire rating. Surface burning characteristics as determined by UL-723 (ASTM E-84), for Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet installed with 3M Fastbond 30, InPro Bond Adhesive, or Formulated Solutions, LLC “XT-2000+" Adhesive shall be a maximum flame spread of 20 and a maximum smoke developed of 350 for .060" (1.5mm) thick material. Provide ULC (Canada) listed Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet conforming to the requirements of the National Building Code of Canada 2010, Subsection 3.1.13. Surface burning characteristics, as determined by CAN/ULC-S102.2, shall be flame spread of 15 and smoke developed of 30.

2. Self Extinguishing: Provide Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet with a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position, as referenced in UBC 52-4-1988.

3. Provide sheet materials that have been tested and results filed in compliance with article 15, part 1120 of the New York State uniform fire prevention and building code. DOS # 09960-930.504.4001.

SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Impact Strength: Provide Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet that has an Impact Strength of 30.4 ft-lbs/ inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.

5. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet that shows resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.

6. GREENGUARD Certified: Provide GREENGUARD Certified material.

Profiles shall meet the requirements of GREENGUARD Certification Standards for Low-Emitting Products and GREENGUARD Product Emission Standard for Children & Schools.

7. Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Provide Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet that does not support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM G-22.

8. Color Consistency: Provide components matched in accordance with SAE J-1545 - (Delta E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab, CIE CMC, CIE LCh, Hunter Lab, or similar color space scale systems.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product data for each type of Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet specified.

B. Detail Drawings: Mounting details with the appropriate adhesives for specific project substrates.

C. Samples: Verification samples of Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet , 8” (203mm) square of each type and color indicated.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Printed installation instructions for Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received.

C. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment.

SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Standard IPC Limited Lifetime Warranty against material and manufacturing defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro Corporation, PO Box 406 Muskego, WI 53150 USA; Telephone: 800.222.5556, Fax: 888.715.8407, www. inprocorp.com OR equal.

B. Provide all Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet and wall protection from a single source.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Rigid Vinyl Sheet

1. Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet Options Item # Dimensions Thickness 305 - 3'x8' (.91m x 2.44m) .040" = 3/64" (1mm), available 306 - 3'x8' (.91m x 2.44m) .060" = 1/16" (1.5mm), available 403 - 4'x8' (1.22m x 2.44m) .030" = 1/32" (.8mm), standard 405 - 4'x8' (1.22m x 2.44m) .040" = 3/64" (1mm), standard 406 - 4'x8' (1.22m x 2.44m) .060" = 1/16" (1.5mm), standard 410 - 4'x8' (1.22m x 2.44m) .080" = 5/64" (2mm), available Also available:
3' x 10' (.91m x 3.04m) sheets - thickness, .040" (1mm) and .060" (1.5mm) 3' x 80' (.91m x 24.3m) rolls - thickness, .060" (1.5mm) 3' x 120' (.91m x 36.5m) rolls - thickness, .040" (1mm) 4' x 10' (1.22m x 3.04m) sheets - thickness, .030" (.8mm), .040" (1mm), .060" (1.5mm)
4' x 80' (1.22m x 24.3m) rolls - thickness, .060" (1.5mm) 4' x 120' (1.22m x 36.5m) rolls - thickness, 030" (.8mm), and .040" (1mm) Custom sizes - available
Backing - unbacked

2. Accessories:

A. Vinyl
407 Top Cap; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available 408 Vertical Divider Bar; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available 409 Inside Corner; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available 417 Top Cap for .080" sheet; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available 418 Vertical Divider Bar for .080" sheet; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available
SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
419 Inside Corner for .080" sheet; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available
B. Stainless Steel
407SS Stainless Steel Top Cap; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard 408SS Stainless Steel Vertical Divider Bar; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard C. Faux Metal (vinyl)
407M Metallic Top Cap; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard
408M Metallic Vertical Divider Bar; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard 409M Metallic Inside Corner; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard D. Aluminum
407A Aluminum Top Cap; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available. 408A Aluminum Vertical Divider Bar; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available.
409A Aluminum Inside Corner; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available.
420A Aluminum Outside Corner ; Length: 8' (2.44m) standard, 10' (3.04m) available.

E. Outside Corners
3448, 3496, 11248 or 11296 Outside Corner
F. Color Matched Caulk

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl: Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet shall be manufactured from chemical and stain resistant unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) with the addition of impact modifiers. No plasticizers shall be added (plasticizers may aid in bacterial growth). Accent strips when used shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Top caps, inside corners, divider bars and outside corners shall be made of extruded PVC.

B. Stainless steel top caps shall be made of #400 series stainless steel.

C. Stainless steel vertical divider bars shall be #400 series stainless steel on galvanized steel.

D. Aluminum top caps, inside corners, divider bars shall be extruded from 6063- T5 aluminum.

2.5 FINISHES
SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Color or pattern of Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet to be selected by the architect from the Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet finish selection. Surface shall have a velvet texture.

B. Vinyl Accessories: Top caps, inside corners, divider bars and outside corners shall be of a color matching the IPC.

C. Stainless Steel Accessories: Top caps and divider bars shall have a polished finish.

D. Aluminum Accessories: Top caps, inside corners and divider bars shall be clear anodized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which the rigid vinyl sheet will be installed.

1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of rigid vinyl sheet materials. Paint substrate with a paint or primer that does not contain polyvinyl acetate (PVA).

B. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, and loose paint.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the IPC installation instructions. Install level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings.

B. Installation of Palladium® Rigid Vinyl Sheet

1. Adhere to substrate with InPro Bond, a freeze-thaw stable, nonflammable, high strength, water based adhesive that trowels on and allows approximately 20 minutes working time before firming.

2. Adhere to substrate with XT-2000+, a freeze-thaw stable, nonflammable, high strength, water based adhesive that trowels on and allows approximately 20 minutes working time before firming.

3. Adhere to substrate with Fastbond 30, a nonflammable, high strength, water-dispersed contact adhesive, with little odor. Smooth roll surface.

SECTION 10 2600

PALLADIUM RIGID VINYL SHEET
MILLS PARK 10 2600 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.4 CLEANING
A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the IPC clean-up and maintenance instructions.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 2813

TOILET ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 10 2813 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Toilet Accessories.

2. Attachment hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Placement of backing and blocking for attachment of accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

2. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

3. ASTM A 366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Data for each accessory describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to California Building Code, 2010 Edition and Federal ADA for mounting heights and locations of accessories.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Deliver accessories in original labeled packaging, bearing manufacturer's name and type of accessory.

SECTION 10 2813

TOILET ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 10 2813 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,

2. Or approval equal as permitted in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements:

Product options and substitutions.

B. Product numbers listed on the drawings are those of Bobrick. If one of the other manufacturers is to be supplied the quality and design shall equal or exceed that of Bobrick.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366, ASTM A 123 to 1.25 ounces per square yard.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.

D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof.

E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS – See Drawings

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.

B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.

C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges.

D. Shop assembles components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

SECTION 10 2813

TOILET ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 10 2813 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify correct location of opening in wall for recessed accessories.

2. Verify that attachment blocking and backing plates are in place in the correct location for accessory connections.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for scheduled installation.

B. Provide and use templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated on Drawings. Use tamper-proof fasteners.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for proper operation.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 4413

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
MILLS PARK 10 4413 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, sizes, anchorage, and installation details.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, indicating product characteristics.

C. Material Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard cabinet color Samples for selection by Architect.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall be manufacturer trained and certified to install the Work of this section.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's wrapping to protect items.

B. Store items in a dry, enclosed area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Location: Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be installed where indicated on Drawings or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer: Fire extinguishers and cabinets shall be manufactured by one of the following:

1. Potter-Roemer.

2. J. L. Industries.

3. Larsen’s Manufacturing.

4. Modern Metal Products.

5. Waltrous.

6. Amerex (fire extinguishers).

7. Equal
C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Potter-Roemer cabinets are listed as the standard of quality, products by other listed manufacturers are acceptable.

1. Surface mounted cabinet: Provide surface mounted, square trim edge cabinet:

SECTION 10 4413

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
MILLS PARK 10 4413 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Potter-Roemer Fire Extinguisher Cabinet 7024:
1) Door Style: either DVL (Duo Vertical Panel with lock) or E (Center Break Glass with lock), glass to be clear
tempered safety glass.
2) Cabinet Door and Frame: Cold rolled steel with
electrostatically applied, thermally fused polyester
coating with re-coatable white finish.
3) Identification Lettering: Cabinet door to be furnished with die cut lettering indicating “FIRE
EXTINGUISHERS” in contrasting color to cabinet finish,
and either vertical or horizontal lettering depending
upon door style.
4) Fire Extinguisher cabinet to protrude more than 4” from finish wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Cabinets shall be installed plumb and level, where indicated on Drawings, at heights required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.3 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary: Prefabricated shade canopy structures.

A. Section Includes:

1. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations necessary for the completion of the work as shown on the drawings. This includes all excavation, concrete footings, backfill, hardware, fittings, and accessories, in accordance with the drawings, specifications and directions of the shade canopy manufacturer.

B. Work installed but not supplied under this section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 1000: Concrete Formwork

2. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Concrete

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing of Materials (ASTM)

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Shade Coverings are prefabricated steel structure as indicated in Landscape Constructio
n Schedule - 3.0 Structures/Buildings on Sheet LCS.2 in the Construction Documents. Shade structures include hard metal cover structures type structures.

B. Design Loads: CBC current edition
C. Design Method: per applicable building code.

D. The pre-engineered package shall be shipped as a pre-cut and prefabricated packag
e that shall include the structural frame members, fasteners, and installation instructions. The structure shall be shipped knocked down for minimum shipping charges. No onsite welding will be allowed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide and submit to the City of Carson Building Department Manufacturer’s engineered drawings to complete the deferred submittal. Engineered Drawings shall be approved prior to installation of shade structures.

SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Provide a minimum of 7 samples to demonstrate color range, and a digital (PDF) or paper document showing a minimum of 7 powder coat color choices.

C. Provide proof of all quality assurance items, including;

1. A list of at least 3 reference projects in California that have been installed a minimum of 12 years.

2. Proof of current State of California Contractor’s License, Class A or Class B.

3. Proof of current IAS certification.

4. Proof of an Annual Maintenance Inspection Program.

D. Submittals shall include shop drawings, Color of shade, post color finish, footing design, engineered drawings, and structural calculations a. Engineered drawings shall signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of California
b. Structural Footing Design is included in the Construction Documents. The contractor shall be responsible for updates based on product / manufacturer substitutions.
c. Fully Engineered Drawings for all shade structures (City purchased and Contractor Purchased) shall be provided by the Contractor.

1. The Contractor Shall purchase Fully Engineered
Drawings from the Manufacturer for Shade Structures
that are to be Purchased and Installed by the contractor.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabrication and erection are limited to firms with proven experience in the design, fabrication, and erection of each type of shade structure, and such firms shall meet the following minimum requirements. No substitutions shall be allowed for the following:

A. A single shade structure contractor shall erect each type of shade structures, including the foundations, and shall provide a dedicated Project Manager throughout the entire Scope of Work related to the shade structure(s).

SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. All bidders shall have at least 15 years’ experience in the design, engineering, manufacture, and erection of each type of shade structure, engineered to California Building Code requirements with similar scope, and a successful construction record of in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer shall be accredited by the IAS (International Accreditation Service) for Structural Steel Fabrication under CBC, Section 1704A.2.5.2.

D. Each type of shade structure contractor shall have a Corporate Quality Control program/manual, which describes their complete quality assurance program.

E. All bidders must be a current Member Contractor with ISNetworld, which confirms the bidder’s strict adherence to Safety, Insurance, Quality, and Regulatory standards.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS:

1. No substitutions of equipment shall be allowed. Shade structure shall be from POLIGON INC.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for each type of shade structure(s) shown on the drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures and verify locations by field measurements prior to erection of the shade structure(s).

1.8 WARRANTY:

1. The successful bidder shall provide a 12-month warranty on all labor and materials.

2. A supplemental warranty from the manufacturer shall be provided for a period of 10 years on the structural integrity of the steel, from date of substantial completion.

3. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under the provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. See plans for detailed information on model and manufacturer.

B. Qualify as an approved equal, please submit product documentation, samples, and all quality assurance criteria, as per Section 1.4, at least 10 days prior to bid in order to be considered. No substitutions will be allowed after the deadline. Any approval of alternate manufacturers shall be by addendum prior to the bid date and shall not be allowed without written notification.

C. Each type of shade structure shall conform to the current adopted version of the California Building Code.

D. Each type of shade structure are designed and engineered to meet the minimum of 115mph Wind Load, Risk Category II, Exposure C, and Seismic (earthquake) Load based on Seismic Design Category D, Seismic Risk Category II, and a Live Load of 5psf. When ASD Steel Design Method is used based on CBC Section 1605A.3.1, the load combinations Dead Load + 0.75 Live load + 0.75 Wind Load, and 0.6 Dead Load + Wind Load must be analyzed. NO EXCEPTIONS.

E. Steel:

1. All steel members of each type of shade structure shall be designed in strict accordance with the requirements of the “American Institute of Steel Construction” (AISC) Specifications and the “American Iron and Steel Institute” (AISI) Specifications for Cold-Formed Members and manufactured in a IAS- (International Accreditation Service) accredited facility for Structural Steel Fabrication under CBC Section 1704A.2.5.2.

2. All connections shall have a maximum internal sleeving tolerance of .0625” using high-tensile strength steel sections with a minimum sleeve length of 6”.

3. All non-hollow structural steel members shall comply to ASTM A-36. All hollow structural steel members shall be cold-formed, high-strength steel and comply with ASTM A-500-10, Grade B. All steel plates shall comply with ASTM A-572, Grade 50. All galvanized steel tubing shall be triple-coated for rust protection using an in-line electroplating coat process. All galvanized steel tubing shall be internally coated with zinc and organic coatings to prevent corrosion.

F. Bolts:

SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. All structural field connections of the shade structure shall be designed and made with high-strength bolted connections using ASTM F3125, Grade A325.

2. Where applicable, all stainless steel bolts shall comply with ASTM F- 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2. All bolt fittings shall include rubber washers for water-tight seal at the joints. All nuts shall comply with ASTM F- 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

G. Welding:

1. All shop-welded connections of the shade structure shall be designed and performed in strict accordance with the requirements of the “American Welding Society” (AWS) Specifications. Structural welds shall be made in compliance with the requirements of the “pre- qualified” welded joints, where applicable and by certified welders. No onsite or field welding shall be permitted.

2. All full penetration welds shall be continuously inspected by an independent inspection agency and shall be tested to meet the requirement of the CBC.

H. Powder Coating:

1. Galvanized steel tubing preparation prior to powder coating shall be executed in accordance with solvent cleaning SSPC-SP1. Solvents such as water, mineral spirits, xylol, and toluol, which are to be used to remove foreign matter from the surface. A mechanical method prior to solvent cleaning, and prior to surface preparation, shall be executed according to Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP3, utilizing wire brushes, abrasive wheels, needle gun, etc.

2. Carbon structural steel tubing preparation prior to powder coating shall be executed in accordance with commercial blast cleaning SSPC-SP6 or NACE #3. A commercial blast cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion, and other foreign material.

3. Powder coating shall be sufficiently applied (minimum 3 mils thickness) and cured at the recommended temperature to provide proper adhesion and stability to meet salt spray and adhesion tests, as defined by the American Society of Testing Materials.

4. Raw powder used in the powder coat process shall have the following characteristics:
a. Specific gravity: 1.68 +/- 0.05
b. Theoretical coverage: 114 +/- 4ft 2/mil
SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Mass loss during cure: <1%
d. Maximum storage temperature: 80oF
e.

Interpon® 800 is a high-durability TGIC powder coating
desig
ned for exterior exposure. Tested against the most severe specifications, Interpon 800 gives significantly improved gloss retention and resistance to color change.

5. Rust protection undercoat primer will be required on all structures.

Sherwin-Williams® POWDURA® epoxy powder coating Z.R Primer shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

Primer should be fused only and then top coated with the selected powder coat to ensure proper inter-coat adhesion.

The primer’s attributes shall be:
a. Specific gravity (g/ml): 2.37
b. Coverage at 1.0 mil (ft 2/lb): 81.6
c.

Adhesion: ASTM D-3359 5B
d. Flexibility: ASTM D-552 Pass 1/8”
e. Pencil hardness: ASTM D-3363 H-2H
f. Impact resistance (in.lb): ASTM D-2794 Dir & Rev, 120 in-lbs g. Salt spray resistance: ASTM B-117 2000 hours
h. Humidity resistance: ASTM D-4585 2000 hours
i. 60° Gloss: ASTM D-523 50 ~ 70
j. Cure schedule (metal temp): 10min @ 200°C (390°F)
25min @ 135°C (275°F)
k. Film thickness tange (mils): 2.0 ~ 3.0
K. Tension Cable: Steel wire rope cable is determined based on calculated engineering loads.

1. 0.25” (nominal) galvanized 7x19 strand core wire rope shall be used for tension loads up to 4,500 lbs.

2. 0.375” (nominal) galvanized 7x19 strand core wire rope shall be used for tension loads up to 9,000 lbs.

3. 0.5” (nominal) galvanized 6x19 strand core wire rope shall be used for tension loads up to 13,500 lbs.

L. Shade and UV Factors:
a. Shade protection and UV screen protection factors shall be provided by the manufacturer.

M. Footings

1. Footings shall be placed in accordance with and conform to the Approved Construction Drawings, Approved Structural
SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Calculations, Approved Engineered Drawings and if available, the latest version of the Soils Report.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying all rebar cages for footings. Rebar cages shall be fabricated by the shade structure manufacturer or contractor and shall meet the requirements of the structural calculations, engineered drawings, and soils report.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of each type of shade structure shall be performed by manufacturer or manufacturer-approved and certified contractor, which shall be bonded and holding a current contractor’s license with the State of California’s Contractors State License Board.
a. The assembly, erection, and installation shall comply with the documents listed above.

B. Concrete:

1. Unless noted otherwise for footings and piers by the Project Engineer, the concrete specification for footings, piers, slabs, curbs, and walkways shall meet a minimum 3,250psi at 28-day strength.

2. Concrete work shall be executed in accordance with the latest edition of American Concrete Building Code ACI 318-14.

3. Concrete specifications shall comply in accordance with the Section 03 3053 Miscellaneous Concrete, detailed as per plans, and shall be as follows:
a. 28 Days Strength F’c = 3250 psi
b. Aggregate: HR
c. Slump: 3 ~ 5 inch
d. Portland Cement shall conform to C-150
e. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33

4. All reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A-615 grade 60.

5. Reinforcing steel shall be detailed, fabricated, and placed in accordance with the latest ACI Detailing Manual and Manual of Standard Practice.

SECTION 10 7300

SHADE CANOPY STRUCTURES
MILLS PARK 10 7300 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. Whenever daily ambient temperatures are below 80 degrees Fahrenheit, the contractor may have mix accelerators and hot water added at the batch plant (See Table 1).

7. The contractor shall not pour any concrete when the daily ambient temperature is to be below 55 degrees Fahrenheit.

TABLE 1
Temperature Range % Accelerator Type Accelerator
75~80 degrees F 1% High Early (non calcium)
70~75 degrees F 2% High Early (non calcium)
Below 70 degrees F 3% High Early (non calcium)
D. Foundations:

1. Refer to Structural Plans included in the Construction Documents and the latest version of the geotechnical report included in the project specifications Appendix and Structural calculations for footing design.

2. All anchor bolts set in new concrete shall comply with ASTM F1554 GR 55.

3. All anchor bolts shall be Hot-Dip Galvanized.
a. Footings and full rebar cages shall be drilled, set, and poured as per manufacturer’s specifications.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 4000

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
MILLS PARK 11 4000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, and appliances required to Furnish and install food service equipment as indicated on the drawings and herein specified.

C. Related work in other Sections:

1. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.

2. Division 22 - Plumbing.

3. Division 26 - Electrical.

D. Contractor shall provide cutting of holes in equipment or fixtures for pipes and drains as required for their installation.

E. Contractor shall provide adequate raceways and accesses in fixtures for the plumbing lines and for Electrical Contractor to install his work. Where there is neglect by the Contractor to provide for such space, he shall make the necessary revisions/repairs to the work without expense to the City. Cutting and patching required by such work shall be reworked to its original finish.

F. Contractor shall provide and locate outlet boxes, receptacles, device plates, switches, junction boxes, where they are a part of the fixture and indicated on equipment electrical layout sheets. All other electrical work shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor, including installation of conduits in fixtures, connection to boxes, and the wiring of electrical outlets and equipment.

G. The drawings indicate the desired basic arrangement and dimensions of the equipment; minor deviations therefore may be substituted for approval according to Section 01 2513, and provided basic requirements are met and no major rearrangements of services to the equipment are required to affect the proposed alteration, such deviations shall be made without expense to City.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the assembled equipment. Tests of the installed equipment shall be required. Defects or deficiencies noted as a result of tests shall be corrected to the entire satisfaction of the City and/or its agent at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall consult the mechanical and electrical drawings and their accompanying specifications to determine additional requirements of the work and shall cooperate with all trades to ensure a completely satisfactory installation.

SECTION 11 4000

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
MILLS PARK 11 4000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
I. Required voltages, cycles and phase and electrical requirements shall be checked before ordering equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be made according to Section 01 3300 and as described herein.

B. Submit the following for each item:

1. The Contractor shall submit for approval two (2) copies of 1/4" scale plans showing location of all plumbing, and electrical with elevations and sections of all special equipment for use of the respective trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the outlets in the building in connection with his work. One copy with approved corrections shall be returned to the Contractor who shall revise such drawings and re- submit two (2) additional copies for final approval.

2. The Contractor shall submit two (2) copies for approval of 3/4" (20mm) scale shop drawings covering all items of work included; detail drawings shall show all dimensions and all details of construction installation and the relation to adjoining and related work; all reinforcements, anchorages and other work required for complete installation. One copy with approval or corrections shall be returned to the Contractor who shall revise such drawings and resubmit two (2) additional copies for final approval. (Scale:
3/4" (20mm) and larger, as required.) Shop drawing blueprints shall not be larger than 30" x 42" (760 x 1060mm).

C. After final approval Contractor shall print and distribute four (4) copies of shop drawings to other interested parties, or as directed by the City.

D. Approval of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the drawings and specifications unless such deviations are approved in writing by the City or his agent.

1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Plumbing and electrical trims, including stainless steel cover plates for outlets and pull boxes, and connections shall be furnished by the respective trades involved, unless otherwise specified.

B. Connections to the mechanical and electrical services are specified under the General Contractor specifications and shall not be considered as part of the SECTION 11 4000

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
MILLS PARK 11 4000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
work of this section, unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings or specifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Food Service Equipment and Fixtures shall be provided and installed using experienced, skilled workmen to the highest standard of workmanship and shall be free of any defects due to faulty workmanship.

B. All work and materials shall conform to the drawings and specifications; any changes or deviations in materials or methods must be approved by the Architect.

C. Food Service Equipment and Fixtures shall meet requirements of local and state codes where applicable. Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and orders of any public authority having jurisdiction over this part of the Work.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking accurate job-site measurements for all dimensions related to the Work.

E. The Contractor shall examine all conditions pertaining to the installation of Food Service Equipment and Fixtures and shall provide all coordination as required to achieve the proper and timely completion of the installation.

F. The Contractor will not change brands of materials during the course of the work unless approved by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment and fixtures shall be provided as indicated on drawings and specifications and as described herein.

B. All electrically operated or heated equipment shall be in full accordance with and will conform to the latest standard of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Electrical Manufacturer's Association and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Where applicable standards have been set up by that agency and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. All steam-heated equipment shall be manufactured in accordance with A.S.M.E. code requirements and shall carry the A.S.M.E. stamp.

SECTION 11 4000

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
MILLS PARK 11 4000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Food service equipment, electric commercial cooking and warming equipment and soda fountain equipment shall conform to standards of the National Sanitation Foundation, standards.

E. "Cord and plug" shall mean a sufficient length (from item to receptacle) of grease resistant insulated cord with cap of sufficient size and capacity to carry the connected load. Plug shall match receptacles.

F. Contractor to verify all pertinent data with City before ordering all items listed in the construction documents Food Service Specialty Equipment Schedule.

G. Contractor to verify the exact voltage and phase to be used prior to ordering any equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DELIVERIES AND STORAGE
A. The equipment and fixtures shall be delivered and installed on schedule.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the City within five (5) days of execution of contract, a Progress Schedule, showing the order of expected progress of the job with the expected starting and completion dates of the various parts of the job.

C. Insofar as possible, work shall be fabricated and finished in the shop and delivered complete to the jobsite ready to set in place.

D. Follow manufacturers' recommendations for all handling and storage of equipment.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in all cases where manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions or prints covering points not shown on the drawings or specifications.

B. Installation of equipment shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's approved shop and installation drawings.

SECTION 11 4000

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
MILLS PARK 11 4000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. State and local health regulations and ordinances and minimum standards of the National Sanitation Foundation Standards Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be fully adhered to and other additional requirements which might develop shall be included to insure a complete sanitary installation.

D. All equipment and fixtures installed against walls shall be sealed off with mastic approved by the Health department to prevent vermin harborage.

E. Contractor shall provide a competent representative to be present when installation is complete and ready to put into operation, and to instruct City's employees in the proper use and maintenance of items and to set up a maintenance schedule.

F. Repair damage done to the premises as a result of installation of equipment and fixtures.

G. During and upon completion of work, remove excess materials, rubbish, and debris from site. Fixtures and equipment shall be wiped clean, and floors swept broom clean.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
MILLS PARK 12 9300 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and install Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified.

B. Related Section.

Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Concrete
C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “Greenbook”, latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the “Greenbook”, unless otherwise determined by the City.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each component and each item of site furniture. Shop drawings shall indicate layouts, component locations, dimensions, set-backs, details of assembly, anchors, footing details and all appurtenances required to assemble components. Three (3) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the City within twenty-one (21) calendar days after award of contract.

B. Product Data: Provide data on all site furniture, equipment and materials, including accessories, utility characteristics, connection requirements and product cut-sheets. Three (3) sets of product data shall be submitted to the City within twenty-one (21) calendar days after award of contract.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide three (3) sets of the manufacturer's installation instructions to the City within twenty (21) calendar days of award after the contract.

D. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer’s representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect all site furnishings. Contractor shall be responsible for all site furnishings and in the event of missing or stolen items, they shall be replaced at the CONTRACTOR’S sole expense.

SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
MILLS PARK 12 9300 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Storage containers utilized on site for storage operations shall be located away from the root zones of existing trees in a location agreed upon by the Engineer.

C. Items to be salvaged and reused / reinstalled shall be stored at a location on site and protected / secured until grading operations and hardscape construction have been completed, and these items are ready to be reinstalled.

1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain all permits (except permanent easements) and licenses and give notice and pay for all fees necessary to complete work under this Section as delineated or specified at no additional cost to City.

B. Manufacturer's directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where the articles used furnish directions and cover points not delineated on the Plans or in the Specifications.

C. The Specifications only indicate the quality and workmanship to be performed rather than a detailed description of the performance of the work. Install said site furnishings, materials and equipment in such a manner that they will operate efficiently and evenly.

D. In the event of any discrepancies between the Plans and the Specifications, the final decision as to which will be followed shall be made by the Engineer, or his designated representative. In the event the installation is contradictory to the direction of the Engineer, the installation shall be rectified by the Contractor at no additional cost to City.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The work shall conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), U.S.

Consumer Product Safety Commission-Public Playground Handbook for Safety, California Disabled Access Regulations-Title 24 and the State Play Equipment Guidelines (SB 2733). The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance and provide written documentation for compliance to the Engineer upon installation of all equipment and material governed by said regulations.

B. All work shall conform to the City standards for public construction and any other agency’s standards for public construction having jurisdiction over the work.

C. Provide certificate(s) of compliance from authority(s) having jurisdiction over the work. The certificate(s) shall indicate approval of products and SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
MILLS PARK 12 9300 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
their installation. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.

1.6 SAMPLES AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. All workmanship, equipment, materials, and articles incorporated shall be the best available grade of their respective kind.

B. Provide a sample and/or clearly delineated cut sheet (including texture, color, and finish clearly delineated) of each component specified.

Accepted samples may be used in the work, subject to approval by the Engineer.

1. For site furnishings, submit pdf typewritten list of equipment and materials as specified to the Engineer within twenty-one (21) days after contract award. This list shall give the name, model number, and manufacturer, and shall be accompanied by cut sheets or reproductions of catalog pages for all equipment and material to be installed.

2. Substitutions shall be of equivalent design intent, size, quality, color, texture, material, delivery time schedule, life-expectancy and warranty to the original item specified.

3. Site Furnishings not matching the City’s standards may be rejected.

Precast items shall be cast in the State of California utilizing low carbon concrete and recycled material content equivalent with the manufacturer indicated on the drawings.

D. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. Pay at Contractor’s sole expense for all changes caused by approved substitutions which affect other items of work.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL
A. Whenever a material or process is delineated or specified by patent, proprietary name or process, or manufacturer’s name, such specifications are used for the purpose of facilitating the description of material or process desired. Approved equivalents are acceptable.

SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
MILLS PARK 12 9300 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Provide any nuts, bolts, washers, conduit, wiring, fittings, adapters, leveling plates, screws, connectors, and/or ties necessary to connect site furnishings to footings, sewer lines, drain lines, and/or electrical lines as shown in the construction documents shall be furnished by the contractor.

C. All surface mount bolts provided by product manufacturers shall be tamper resistant stainless-steel bolts. All washers provided by manufacturers shall be stainless steel.

D. Bolts and washers not provided by manufacturers for surface mounting applications shall be tamper resistant stainless steel and sized per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2.2 COMPONENTS
A. See construction plans for site furnishing information.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that layout and site are compatible.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Layout and stake locations of components for approval by Engineer prior to installation.

B. Review layout requirements with other affected work.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with City standards and manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Provide concrete footings for site furnishings as detailed on the Plans or as herein specified for new and salvaged site furnishings.

3.4 SITE CONDITIONS
Promptly repair damage to facilities caused by construction operations. Cost of repair at Contractor’s sole expense.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL – FEATURES

1.0 GENERAL SCOPE
A. Section Includes:
a. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations necessary for the completion of the work as shown on the drawings. This includes, but is not limited to all excavation, concrete footings, required backfill, hardware, fittings, nozzles, piping, wiring, and accessories, including the aquatic play pad controller, water management systems, and finishes as required, in accordance with the drawings, specifications and directions of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Related Sections:
a. Section 03 1000 Concrete Formwork
b. Section 03 3053 Miscellaneous Concrete

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
a. The installation shall be as indicated on the drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation as reviewed and approved by the owner. The installation shall be accomplished by skilled work personnel (amend this with each proposal to include a Waterplay Preferred Installer if applicable in your territory).

B. Water Treatment System (WTS):
a. The WTS shall be sized to meet the needs of the maximum park flow rate, not only the sequenced park flow rate. The treatment system shall provide, where required by health authority, secondary disinfection or as an option.
b. The WTS shall be capable of remote access to allow for off-site troubleshooting, data logging and programming changes. The WTS shall log water quality data and be configured to interface with a supervisory control system.
c. The WTS shall enable flexibility in room layout by allowing variations in the filter train arrangement. All equipment, with exception of the filters and CO2 tank, shall be skid mounted.
d. Factory pressure and flow testing shall be conducted to ensure mechanical integrity of the system prior to shipping.
e. Factory electrical and control testing shall be conducted on all actuated valves, sensors, VFDs, chemical controllers, and secondary disinfection equipment to ensure that all devices are functioning independently and as an integrated system prior to shipping.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
f. The WTS shall include secondary disinfection where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Should secondary disinfection not be required, the WTS system shall be manufactured such that future upgrades to secondary disinfection do not require reworking the skid piping. UV unit shall be mounted on a corrosion resistant aluminum skid. Power shall be supplied by the main treatment system control panel. UV unit must allow for remote monitoring of alarm states. Clear Comfort shall be offered as an alternative to UV in the instance whereby it’s requested.
g. A rain diverter with electronic valve shall be available with the skid mounted system. An appropriately sized holding tank shall also be available with the skid mounted equipment

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Submittals:
a. Contractor shall submit 6 copies for approval before beginning work. b. Submit manufacturer's product data for aquatic play features and system components including vault, activator(s), water treatment system including UV sterilization if applicable, pipes, fittings and valves.
c. Submit drawings to indicate layout of aquatic play area components and location of anchors and footings. Clearly indicate, to scale the spatial relationship of each piece of equipment to each other and to other existing or proposed features including adjacent surfaces or vegetation. Indicate to a scale the limits of spray zones and non- encroachment areas to clearly demonstrate conformance with specified standards.
d. Submit shop drawings of the aquatic play features including spray nozzles and colors, for approval.

B. Closeout Submittals:
a. Comply with requirements in Section (insert#), Contract Closeout. b. All aquatic play features are to carry a minimum warranty of two (2) year on all workmanship and materials. Submit warranty to Owner. c. Provide maintenance and winterizing data.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If proposing a substitute equipment manufacturer. Contractor must provide the following:
a. A chart detailing any and all interactivity, control, data logging and access, data reporting, aesthetic, flow, size, material, performance or any other product characteristics that do not match the specified aquatic play pad/Activity Tower (select one or the other or both depending on the project).
b. A written description of the aquatic play pad/Activity Tower operational sequence.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Detailed color product cut sheets for all aquatic play features, water management systems,
controllers including detailed descriptions and
screen shots of the on-line access and reporting systems software. d. Letter from manufacturer stating that the prop osed spray features, controls and park operational and maintenance programs are a part of the manufacturer’s standard product catalog and have been manufactured and installed on at least five (5) other similar projects. If any of the items being proposed are custom features, the manufacturer should then provide references from at least two previous clients who have purchased customized features from them.
e. Product installation details.
f. Spray radius layout including correct overspray zones as indicate d on the provided plans.
g. Plumbing and electrical diagrams
h. Water flow and pressure calculati ons for all features, pipes, fittings, connections, valves and related plumbing stamped by a registered in the state/province of XX engineer or xx designer, confirming that the proposed design meets the flow requirements and maximum velocities and/or the current building codes.
i. Signed letter from the proposed equipment manufacturer stating that they will pay for all costs (engineering, redesign, construction drawings) that may arise due to any variation from the specified manufacturers’ plans and total system design.
h. All proposed substitutions must be approved by the loca l Health Authority prior to submission (when applicable). Plans not approved prior to submission will be rejected.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to ensure that a ll criteria are satisfied and the burden of proof of conformance shall rest with the contractor. The Engineer shall require complete calculation, past performance records, and if required, inspection trips of similar facilities to substantiate conformance with these criteria. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of conformance, and the Contractor is cautioned that he will be required to Bid and provide a finished product meeting all stated criteria. It is recommended that the contractor or project manager follow an inspection and approval process, as provided by the manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
a. Manufacturers shall have a minimum 10 years’ expe rience in the manufacture of aquatic play features and components. The person(s) responsible for installation shall have supervised/installed a minimum of 3 (three) installations in the State of California.
b. Manufacturer shall provide independent and accredited certifi cation that applies an environmental management system which meets the requirements of ISO 14001:2004 in its design, manufacturing, sales, SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
marketing and servicing of recreational aquatic products and accessories.
c. Manufacturer shall provide independent and accredited certification that applies a quality management system which meets the requirements of ISO 9001:2008 in its design, manufacturing, sales, marketing and servicing of recreational aquatic products and accessories.
d. The person(s) responsible for installation shall be on-site performing such service.
e. Licensed plumbers and electricians shall be used as required by local codes.
f. General contractor shall have experience managing the installation of at least three (3) previous splash pads.

C. Storage and Protection:
a. Protect pre-finished metal from abrasion and corrosion during storage and assembly.
b. DO NOT remove packaging from components prior to pouring final slab.

D. Product Delivery:
a. Deliver materials to job site in an undamaged condition. b. Inspect all items for abraded surfaces and other unacceptable deliver conditions. Return damaged or non-conforming items to manufacturer for replacement.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Weather Requirements:

B. Substrate Requirements:
a. Do not place concrete on muddy or frozen substrate.
b. Remove mud, dirt, and ice from formwork surfaces.

C. Existing Conditions:
a. Locate underground utility systems and other below grade site improvements in area of surface and footing excavations. b. Call City of (insert name) at (phone #) for underground utility locations 48 hours in advance of excavation, removing soil materials and boring post holes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.0 MANUFACTURER
A. Aquatic play features, slide activity towers and water management systems shall be Waterplay® named designs and model numbers, as manufactured by Waterplay by MAKR, 805 Crowley Ave, Kelowna, BC Canada V1Y 7G6.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the installation specifications. The contractor shall use due care when installing the features.

Protective wrapping shall be left intact throughout the installation and be removed only upon completion. Structures shall be installed in accurate locations, square, centered, plumbed, and at the required elevation relative to final grade on footings as per the layout.

C. All phases of the installation shall be inspected by the owner, or an authorized representative of the owner, up to and including the final inspection as laid out in the Waterplay Project Inspection Checklist.

2.1 PRODUCTION CONSTRUCTION:

A. Above ground aquatic play features shall be constructed of Stainless Steel Type A304 or A304L, schedule 40 or 10. Stainless steel base plate materials will be 2B finish at 3/8” thick. Each spray fixture shall have a 1 ½” NPT coupling water inlet.

B. In-ground aquatic play features shall be 2 ½” schedule 40 or 6” schedule 40, type A304 stainless steel canisters with a machined nozzle seat. Each fixture will have a 1” NPT coupler water inlet. Each fixture shall have mounting holes to accommodate stainless steel L-type anchor bolts to be set in a concrete footing.

C. Aquatic play features are to meet ADA compliance for handicap accessibility and meet or exceed current ASTM playground safety standards.

D. Aquatic play features will be supplied with all necessary anchoring hardware and installation templates to accommodate site work.

E. Aquatic play features anchoring system shall provide the ability to add, remove and interchange products without having to change infrastructure and footings. The component shall be fastened directly to the base flange with an EPDM gasket to provide a water tight seal between the component flange and the base flange. The base must be flush-to-grade with no visible hardware or dome cover. The base must have the ability to attach a grounding lug.

F. All aquatic play features shall have fittings that allow for winter close off.

G. All aquatic play features of below grade design shall address winterization.

2.2 NOZZLES
A. Aquatic play feature nozzles shall be constructed of acetal copolymer or urethane. Nozzles shall be non-corrosive, impervious to galling, precision machined. Brass and Nylon are not acceptable. A mechanical workbook must SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
be supplied to show individual flow rates for each feature including maximum and average flow for each pre-programmed sequence step.

B. Nozzles shall be secured using stainless steel fasteners.

2.3 COATINGS
A. Fixtures shall receive a pre-treatment stainless steel epoxy primer followed by a coat of weather-resistant super durable TGIC free polyester powder, baked application. Standard powder coatings are not acceptable. Brushed stainless finish is the exception.

B. Powder coatings shall be weather resistant and have ultraviolet inhibitors.

Coatings shall have a high gloss finish, have ultraviolet inhibitors, withstand 1/10th no removal @160 in/lb, exceed all specifications of organic coatings, and a film thickness of between 2.5 to 3.0 mils (determined by color and finish). Where theme graphics are applied, a base clear coat system will be applied. Supply aerosol primer and touch up paint, color code as specified for aquatic play features.

C. Equipment must be packaged in a three step packaging process as follows:
a. The first layer is open cell 1/8” foam wrapping.
b. The second layer is a corrugated cardboard.
c. The final layer is a waterproof polyethylene tarp wrap.

D. Product must be shipped in dedicated nose load shipments secured with strapping.

2.4 ELECTRICAL
A. All electronic operating systems shall be manufactured by Waterplay Solutions Corp., British Columbia Canada, or approved equal.

All electrical control panels shall be UL/CUL approved specifically for aquatic play area operations and must bear certification logos.

B. All wiring to be specified by the manufacturer of the aquatic play features.

C. The actuating device shall be encapsulated within a 304 stainless steel casing and be UV, moisture, graffiti, and impact resistant.

D. All control system materials are to be of industrial grade quality and controller enclosures shall be rated @ NEMA 4.

E. All Waterplay® components shall be grounded using bare #6 AWG wire and an approved ground lug.. Consult local electrical inspector for local codes and final inspection.

F. Electrical connection shall be 1” National Pipe Thread (NPT) coupler to be located near the bottom of the component.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Power supply to the Waterplay® control panel shall be 120V AC, with a 15amp GFCI dedicated breaker
G. All wire connections must be watertight.

H. Solenoid valves must be PVC, and of type having 24V AC, 0.250 mA max. holding current coil rating with flow control (Rainbird PGA series or equal).

Valve wire shall be #18 AWG type R90, one per valve, plus one common back to the controller location.

2.5 WATER DISTRIBUTION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Main line pipe and fittings to be schedule 40 PVC or greater. The distribution laterals and fittings are to be schedule 40 PVC or greater. Ensure that a proper slope is consistently applied to all piping to ensure positive gravity- assisted drainage of the entire system. Ensure all fittings are secured to close openings (off season) to protect from water entry of water back into the piping system. (See nozzles section).

B. Solenoid valves must be PVC, and of type having 24V AC, 0.250 mA max. holding current coil rating with flow control (Rainbird PGA series or equal).

Valve wire shall be #18 AWG type R90, one per valve, plus one common back to the controller location.

2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. All hardware, fittings and fastenings shall be as indicated on the shop drawings and may be required to complete the installation. Anchor fasteners to be stainless steel.

B. Lag bolts shall be stainless steel with flat type vandal-proof head in size indicated on plans. Anchors shall be stainless steel in size required. (tamper proof hardware shall be stainless steel, complete with owner supplied hardware security tools).

2.7 FEATURE SPECIFICATIONS
PRODUCT CODE 0010-8943
playPHASE Foot Activator
Characteristics The playPHASE Foot Activator shall be constructed of an 8.0- inch (191mm) diameter cast urethane. There shall be a recess in the centre to accept a touch sensitive activator sensor.

Stainless steel tamper resistant fasteners shall pass through the activator sensor, affixing both it, and the urethane to a stainless-steel plate. The plate shall then be secured to an embedded playPHASE base.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Dimensions: The overall height of the activator shall be no less than 1.0 inch (36mm) above final grade. The overall width of the activator shall be no less than 8.0 inches (191mm) in
diameter.

Anchoring/Levelling
System:

See Playphase Base Small written spec for more detail.

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7474
GS Buttercup
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of 11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X

5.5-inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall consist of 3 large, curved slots angled at 75 º. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 7 gpm @ 3 psi (26 lpm @ 20 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7476
GS Confetti Spray
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of 11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X

5.5-inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall consist of 8 large outer orifices and 8 small inner orifices angled at 79º and 85º, respectively. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 5 gpm @ 3.5 psi (19 lpm @ 24 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0011-3933
GS Fandango
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of

11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5- inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall have seven .25-inch (6.35mm) holes that spray water at 65 degrees from horizontal.

Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 11 gpm @ 2 psi (2 lpm @ 14 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7505
GS Luminary Spray USA
Characteristics The ground spray canister shall be constructed of schedule 10 stainless steel tubing and shall measure Ø8 inches (203mm) in diameter. Each canister shall be equipped with the 12V LED RGB Luminary with 50 ft (15.2m) of cable and a stainless-steel cover plate with a decorative pattern. The light shall be QPS certified.

One (1) blank acetal nozzles and aluminum cover plate shall be provided for winterization.

Dimensions: The overall height of the canister shall be 12 inches (304mm) and shall be flush to grade. The plate shall be Ø8 inches (203mm) in diameter.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be dependant on the nozzle chosen. Refer to GS nozzle selected for the application for flow rate and pressure requirements.

Nozzles: One (1)
Light will shine through the decorative cover plate illuminating the water discharged from the nozzle. Water display will be dependent on the nozzle chosen.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7479
GS Misty Mountain
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of

11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5- inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall have two (2) slant jet holes that create a mist under pressure. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 2 gpm @ 7 psi (8 lpm @ 48 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7480
GS Monster 5
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of

11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5- inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall have a five (5) hole spray pattern angled at 15 degrees from vertical. The hydraulic requirements shall be 32 gpm @ 15 psi (121 lpm @ 103.4 kpa). Tamper resistant winter caps are included. The water inlet shall be 1 inch (25mm) National Pipe Thread located

1.41 inches (35.8mm) below the base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 10 gpm @ 2 psi (38 lpm @ 14 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7497
SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS
GS Spray Tunnel 8
Characteristics The eight (8) spray canisters shall be connected to two (2) 58-inch (1473mm) base rails that works as a distribution manifold. The two (2) rails shall be bolted together inline with one another for a total length of 123 inches (3124mm). Each canister shall be no less than 6 inches (152mm) tall with a diameter of Ø2.88 inches (73mm). The Acetal spray nozzles and winter caps shall be seated into the canisters with a o-rings and secured using tamper resistant security bolts. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

All nozzles sit flush with final grade. There shall be two (2) 1.5 inch (38mm) National Pipe Thread water inlet located at the centre of each rail.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount with an overall height of 8 inches (203) and length of 123 inches (3124mm)
Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 30 gpm @ 4 psi (114 lpm @ 28 kpa).

Nozzle Count: Eight (8)
Water Display: Water will flow through eight (8) 2.5" acetal nozzles. If restriction is placed on any nozzle, the flow and height on the remaining nozzles will increase.

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7485
GS Straight Up
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of

11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25-inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5- inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall consist of 8 small orifices. Tamper resistant winter caps are included the water inlet shall be 1 inch (25mm) National Pipe Thread located 1.41 inches (35.8mm) below the base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 6 gpm @ 6 psi (23 lpm @ 41 kpa).

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-9816
SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
GS Team Effect
Characteristics The eight (8) spray canisters shall be connected to two (2) 54-inch (1371mm) base rails that work as a distribution manifolds. The two (2) rails shall be bolted together inline with one another for a total length of 123 inches (3124mm). Each canister shall be no less than 6 inches (152mm) tall with a diameter of Ø2.88 inches (73mm). The Acetal spray nozzles and winter caps shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using tamper resistant security bolts. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.

All nozzles sit flush with final grade. There shall be one 1.5 inch (38mm) National Pipe Thread water inlet located in the center of each base rail, requiring a single supply line tee’d to each inlet.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 8 gpm @ 1 psi (30 lpm @ 7 kpa).

Nozzle Count: Eight (8)
Water Display: Water will flow through eight (8) 2.5" acetal nozzles. If restriction is placed on any nozzle, the flow and height on the remaining nozzles will increase.

PRODUCT
CODE
0010-7489
GS Tulip
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of

Tamper resistant winter caps are included. The water inlet shall be 1 inch (25mm) National Pipe Thread located 1.41 inches (35.8mm) below the base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8-inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister.

Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.

Recommended
Flow Rate:

The hydraulic requirements shall be 6 gpm @ 0.75 psi (23 lpm @ 5 kpa).

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PRODUCT CODE 0010-4133

DRAIN CIRCULAR STAINLESS STEEL
Characteristics The drain body shall be made from 18-inch schedule 10 stainless steel pipe. An upper flange ring shall be welded in place to accommodate for a drain grate that shall have no less than 40.47 sq inches (26109 sq mm) of open area for water flow. The max grate opening shall be no more than 0.31
inches (7.93mm). A 6-inch pipe flange shall be welded to the body. A stainless-steel strainer basket shall fit inside with perforations no more than 0.125 inches (3.18mm). A 22-inch (559mm) diameter flange shall be cut from 0.1875-inch
stainless steel plate and welded to the body bottom to function as an installation bolt pass through.

Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 18 inches (462) mm. The overall diameter of the structure shall be no less than 18 inches (457mm). The pipe flange location shall be no less than 12 inches (292mm). The mounting flange shall be no less than 22 inches (559mm) in diameter.

Recommended Flow
Rate:

The flow capacity of the drain through the 6-inch pipe is 140 gpm (530lpm). This measurement is based on a 6-inch
drainpipe at a 2% slope.

PRODUCT CODE 0011-2156
PlayPHASE Base Small
Characteristics The PlayPHASE base Small shall be a fully welded assembly.

A main body shall be constructed of 4 inch (DN100) stainless steel schedule 10 pipe. A machined mounting flange will be welded to the top of the main body, and a 0.5 inch (12.7mm) thick stainless-steel baseplate welded to the bottom. A 1.5-inch (40mm) F-NPT coupler shall be welded to the main body to supply water. Eight (8) 0.5 inch (12.7mm) threaded holes shall be drilled in the top flange for feature mounting. The backside of these holes shall be capped with laser welded nut caps to ensure zero leak paths. The top flange shall incorporate an outer lip to ensure the aluminum cover and feature flange is recessed and flush to grade. A Neoprene gasket and aluminum cover shall be included for winterization.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Installers:

B. Firm with minimum of 10 aquatic play pad installations and identified as a Preferred Installer by the manufacturer.

C. Pre-approved general contractor as identified by the owner D. The installation shall be accomplished by skilled work personnel. The installation of all water pipe and fittings, and the installation of all electrical wiring and conduit, shall be under the direct full-time supervision of a licensed corresponding trade, as approved by the owner. (See Waterplay “Inspection and Approval” section of Manufacturer’s Owner Manual for more details).

3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Verification of Conditions:
a. Examine all fixtures and components and verify that equipment is undamaged and ready for field assembly.
b. Return damaged and non-conforming products to the manufacturer. c. Identify location of underground utility lines on surface.

B. Protection:
a. Protect adjacent facilities, plants, trees, ground covers, grass, paved surfaces, and other site improvements from damage during assembly and installation.

C. Layout and Excavation:
a. Lay out aquatic play features, components and supply and drain lines within pool areas.
b. Excavation for Foundation: All excavation shall be cut accurately to required lines and dimensions for work on drawings and shall be large enough to provide adequate clearance for the proper execution of the work within them.

D. Concrete Placement and Cast in Place Footings:
a. Obtain approval from Owner's Representative prior to pouring concrete.
b. Inspection: When the excavation has been carried to the required depth as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall do no more work until after the inspection by the Engineer, who shall order the foundation work to proceed, or further excavation as the conditions indicate, and no other work shall be done until the excavation has been approved by the Engineer.

SECTION 13 1400

SPLASH PAD SPRAY ELEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 13 1400 - 15

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Installation
a. Aquatic play features shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and approved by the owner. The contractor shall use extreme care when installing aquatic play features.

All wrappings are to be left intact through installation and then to be removed upon completion.
b. Entire assemblies shall be installed in accurate location, square and plumb, and in required location to surrounding finished grade, on footings, as shown on the plans. Prior to park commissioning all features must be flushed with potable water and the water balanced should a water treatment system be part of the project
c. An owner/operator training meeting must be conducted and documented prior to handoff of the project.

3.3 COMPLETION
A. Testing: All aquatic play feature lead lines shall be water pressure tested as directed by local codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations before backfilling and pouring of concrete slabs. The contractor is to ensure all water supply lines are free of debris, and flushed of any foreign material, prior to the hook-up of any aquatic play features, and the contractor shall have inspected the entire system (including all electronic systems) in the presence of the Owners Representative. The contractor is to ensure all nozzles are adjusted and secured to the owner's satisfaction. The contractor is to test all drainage systems of the aquatic play features. Refer to the Installation manual for a full description of related tasks prior to completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The installation shall be as indicated on construction and manufacturer’s drawings, and in accordance with local codes/regulations, and the manufacturer's recommendation as reviewed and approved by the owner. The installation shall be accomplished by skilled work personnel.

1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The Water Treatment System (WTS) shall be sized to meet the needs of the maximum park flow rate, not only the sequenced park flow rate. The treatment system shall provide, where required by health authority, secondary disinfection or as an option.

B. The WTS shall be capable of remote access to allow off-site troubleshooting, data logging and programming changes. The WTS shall log water quality data and be configured to interface with a supervisory control system.

C. The WTS shall enable flexibility in room layout by allowing variations in the filter train arrangement. All equipment, with exception of the filters and CO2 tank, shall be skid mounted.

D. Factory pressure and flow testing shall be conducted to ensure mechanical integrity of the system prior to shipping.

E. Factory electrical and control testing shall be conducted on all actuated valves, sensors, VFDs, chemical controllers, and secondary disinfection equipment to ensure that all devices are functioning independently and as an integrated system prior to shipping.

F. The WTS shall include secondary disinfection where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Should secondary disinfection not be required, the WTS system shall be manufactured such that future upgrades to secondary disinfection do not require reworking the skid piping. UV unit shall be mounted on a corrosion resistant aluminum skid. Power shall be supplied by the main treatment system control panel. UV unit must allow for remote monitoring of alarm states. Clear Comfort shall be offered as an alternative to UV in the instance whereby it’s requested.

G. A rain diverter with electronic valve shall be available with the skid mounted system.

H. An appropriately sized holding tank shall also be available with the skid mounted equipment.

SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.3 SCOPE
A. Plumbing and wiring to the WTS skid, filters, secondary disinfection skid, holding tank, diverter & strainer, and the spray pad features will be performed by qualified trades and shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

B. Engineering and local health authority approvals are the responsibility of the owner and/or their representative.

C. Provision of Internet connection to the WTS controller is the responsibility of the owner and/or their representative.

D. Filter sand and treatment chemicals shall be provided by the owner and/or their representative.

E. The WTS manufacturer shall submit the following information:

F. “Not for Construction” drawings including a suggested layout of WTS equipment, Process & Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID), electrical power requirements, and wiring schematics for a skid-mounted WTS.

G. List of major equipment.

H. WTS Operation and Maintenance Manual including all manuals supplied by the equipment manufacturers.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Waterplay Water Treatment System Design and Installation Drawings.

B. Waterplay Water Treatment System Operation & Maintenance Manual.

C. Waterplay WTS Specification of Roles and Responsibilities.

D. Waterplay Warranty Policy.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER
A. The WTS manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience manufacturing spray park water treatment systems. An ISO 9001:2015 quality assurance program must be in place at the manufacturing facility.

B. The manufacturer shall have in-house engineering resources dedicated to the design of water management and treatment systems.

C. A manufacturer-approved and experienced technician shall be used for commissioning and on-site system training. The manufacturer shall provide post installation support.

SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 COMPLIANCES
A. Local regulations & codes, national and international standards, applicable health codes, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. WTS components shall be ELEC approved by an accredited third party. Where applicable, components shall have NSF International (NSF) 50 or equivalent approvals.

C. Design of the WTS must adhere to best practices outlined in the Model Aquatic Health Code (MAHC), unless the MAHC conflicts with local codes, regulations, or guidelines.

PART 2 PRODUCT

1. Refer to Plans
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEM
A. The manufacturer shall identify all potential hazards on the equipment with clearly visible stickers or markings. Safety information shall be included in the WTS Operation & Maintenance Manual.

B. Associated piping, fittings, and valves on the WTS skid shall be schedule 80 PVC with the exception of the static mixer and backwash valves which may be schedule 40 PVC.

C. The manufacturer shall provide permanent, waterproof labels with flow direction.

D. The manufacturer shall conduct a pre-shipping in-house test of the equipment to ensure a complete working system.

E. The WTS shall use an NSF50 listed centrifugal pump, complete with strainer basket, and the system shall be self-priming. The pump shall be capable of delivering the maximum possible park flow rate and provide a minimum 20psi to the spray park manifold. The pump shall be capable of turning over the total tank volume a minimum of once every 30 minutes. A flow switch shall be installed on the pump discharge, disabling the pump because of a sustained low flow event.

F. A Variable Frequency Drive shall be used to control pump speed. Where permitted by the AHJ, the pump shall shut down outside of park operating hours and shall start up a set time before park opening hours. VFD will vary pump rpm to adjust flow to appropriate backwash setpoint.

SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
G. A pressure sustaining valve shall be used to maintain the pressure in the park manifold by running at full speed on start up, then reducing to desired set speed.

H. System shall be a single loop system. Uses single pump to circulate water through the system to ensure 100% filtration.

I. System shall have automated multi-port valve backwash.

J. Shall have flow switch safety interlocks to protect against no/low flow situations.

K. Shall have accommodations for future UV installation.

3. 2 WTS CONTROLLER
A. The WTS Controller shall be capable of remote access to the PLC program, system variables, and the Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen.

B. The controller shall have a color Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen through which operators can modify park sequencing, park, and backwash schedules, and manually activate all pumps, valves, and secondary disinfection equipment.

C. The controller shall operate the 24VAC solenoid valves on the park manifold.

D. The controller shall have the ability to purge the water lines prior to park opening.

E. The WTS controller includes power distribution to all WTS components, including the Diverter Strainer System (DSS), park manifold valves and activators. Integral to the controller shall be a disconnect and VFD for pump motor control.

F. The WTS controller shall interface with the chemical controller, secondary disinfection controller and disable water flow to the features should water chemistry alarm or secondary disinfection alarm be activated.

G. The WTS controller shall operate and monitor the valve located in the Diverter Strainer System.

H. The WTS controller shall accommodate 3 phase, 208 VAC, 60Hz or 1 phase, 240VAC, 60Hz.

I. The WTS controller shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure.

3.3 FILTRATION
A. The high rate sand filters shall be NSF50 listed and sized for a nominal filter service rate of 15 US GPM/ft2 and come complete with filter air release valves and a pressure gauge. Sand filters shall be sized to accommodate a minimum SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
holding tank turnover of once every 30 minutes. A balance valve shall be provided for each filter.

B. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically backwashing the filters according to schedule. Clear plumbing shall be installed on each filter.

3.4 CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER
A. The controller shall be microprocessor based and shall feature separate digital readouts for ORP and pH. All instrumentation shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X rated glass-filled polycarbonate cabinet with a clear window cover. All operating controls, calibration adjustments and safety alarm settings shall be accessible from the front panel.

B. The control system shall automatically activate the appropriate chemical feeders in order to maintain the Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) of the Free Active Sanitizer level setpoints selected by the operator. Setpoint selection shall be by direct dialing on scales calibrated in mV of ORP and in pH units. pH priority option shall bring pH with 0.2 pH of set point prior to chlorine injection.

C. The control system shall include the following feed modes: off, manual, or automatic. Programmable pH and ORP overfeed times shall provide protection against overfeed chemicals.

D. The face panel shall feature two LED digital readouts for mV of ORP and for pH units. Calibration of the pH display shall be adjustable from the front panel, using a standard chemical test kit for pH. ORP requires no calibration.

E. Visual and remote alarms shall be activated by high/ low pH or sanitizer conditions and by the overfeed safety timers. All alarm settings shall be adjustable from the front panel.

F. All electronics shall be mounted on a single enclosed PVC backboard.

G. Chemical controller shall integrate with WTS controller to monitor chemical dosing trends.

H. WARRANTY
a. Controller and sensors shall come with a comprehensive 1 year warranty b. The manufacturer shall supply a complete instruction, operating and maintenance manual.

3.5 HOLDING TANK
A. It shall be sized to accommodate a 30 minute turnover time based on park flow SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
rate. A cast-in-place concrete or prefabricated fiberglass tank shall be used.

B. The tank shall include an access ladder, manway, lockable access hatch and level float control valve for water make-up line.

C. Where an FRP tank is used, deadman anchors, hold down straps and turnbuckles shall be available if deemed necessary by the project engineer.

D. All inlet and outlet fittings shall be appropriately sized for the pump suction line, bypass return line, spray park drain line, tank overflow and fresh water fill line.

The tank overflow shall be connected to the sanitary system via a backwater check valve.

E. GENERAL
a. Backfill is a critical part of a proper tank installation. i. Both primary and secondary backfill material is to be clean, free- flowing, and free of dirt, sand, large rocks, roots, organic materials, debris, ice and snow.
ii. No backfill material shall be frozen or contain lumps of frozen material any time during compaction or placement.

F. PRIMARY BACKFILL
a. Use coarse aggregate (rounded stones or crushed stones) as primary backfill material.
i. Rounded stone to be 0.75IN MAX. to 0.125IN MIN.
ii. Crushed stone to be 0.50IN MAX. to 0.125IN MIN.
b. Primary backfill material should be a mix of well-graded stones, generally conforming to the 6, 67, 7 and 8 sizes of ASTM's C33.
c. No more than 5% of this material can be small enough to pass through the #8 sieve.
d. Do not use materials like soft limestone, sandstone, sea shells or shale that break down over time.

G. SECONDARY BACKFILL (used in split backfill installations) a. Examples of acceptable secondary backfill material are:
i. Clean native backfill
ii. Coarse sand
iii. Gravel
SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
b. Secondary backfill must be compact to achieve a minimum of 85% standard proctor density.
c. 100% of secondary backfill material must pass through a 1IN [250mm] sieve.
d. Secondary material must be installed in 12IN [300mm] to 24IN [610mm] lifts compatible with the compaction equipment used.
e. When using secondary backfill, consider potential frost-related problems to avoid frost heave.
f. Requirements of the piping, surface slab or roadway used may determine specifications for secondary backfill material and compaction above the filter-fabric layer.
g. Refer to applicable codes or standards for base course and sub-base course material and compaction requirements.

3.6 MANIFOLD
A. The manifold shall have a 4 inch schedule 10 stainless steel header, pressure gauge and ½ inch (12 mm) hose bib.

B. The manifold shall have schedule 80 PVC true union ball valves plumbed off each independent leg of the header and connected to Rainbird PGA 100 series solenoid valves with 1.5 inch (38mm) schedule 80 PVC unions on each outlet supply to components.

C. Each valve leg shall be independently removable without shutting down manifold flow to allow for servicing of solenoid valves during operational hours.

D. A solenoid valve NEMA 4X wire junction box mounted to the manifold structure.

E. The manifold shall be connected to a butterfly valve for shut off and servicing.

3.7 ADD ONS
A. Diverter Strainer System: Yes
B. A diverter and strainer system shall house a debris screen and diverter valve in a below grade tank and allow for access via an aluminum, hinged lockable hatch. The tank body shall be constructed of corrugated HDPE with a 30 inch diameter.

C. The diverter valve shall be an electrically actuated butterfly valve, complete with limit switches. The valve shall be powered, actuated and monitored by the WTS controller based on park operating hours and park inactivity. The valve shall be SECTION 13 1401

SPLASH PAD WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
MILLS PARK 13 1401 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
normally closed during park use, sending all flow from the park drain to the holding tank. After park hours or after a period of park inactivity, the valve shall divert rain water from the spray pad to the sewer, thereby avoiding dilution of holding tank chemicals.

D. The DSS debris screen shall be a stainless steel screen basket with no greater than 1/8 inch perforated holes.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Waterproofing.

2. Electrical Connections and Protection.

3. Supports and anchors.

4. Cleaning, Protection and Adjustment.

5. Dielectric Fittings.

6. Piping connections.

7. Mechanical Identification.

8. Sleeves and Seals.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants.

2. 099100 - Painting: Field painting.

1.2 WATERPROOFING
A. Where work penetrates waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the Engineer shall approve the method of installation prior to performing the work.

Furnish necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings watertight.

1.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND PROTECTION
A. Regardless of voltage, provide control wiring, interlock wiring, and equipment control wiring for the equipment provided under this division of the specifications.

B. Furnish electrical disconnect switches, starters and combination starter disconnects required for equipment provided under this division of the specifications. Circuit breakers furnished shall be rated for motor protection.

C. Power wiring not used for control functions, complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters, shall be provided under Division 26.

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Coordinate to ensure that electrical devices furnished or provided are compatible with the electrical systems used.

E. Confirm final location of electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping.

1.4 PAINTING
A. Painting requirements of this section shall conform to Division 9 – Finishes:

Painting.

B. Provide field painting of systems, equipment and miscellaneous metals located outdoors. Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Provide painting of plumbing piping and equipment exposed in mechanical equipment room and in occupied spaces. Plumbing items to be painted are as follows:

1. Piping, pipe hangers, pipe insulation, and supports

2. Equipment and support.

3. Accessory items.

1.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Cleaning

1. General cleaning requirements are specified in Division 1 – General Requirements.

2. Upon completion of the work, clean the exterior surface of equipment, accessories, and trim installed. Clean, polish, and leave equipment, accessories, and trim in first-class condition.

B. Protection of Surfaces

1. Protect surfaces from damage during the construction period.

2. Provide plywood or similar material under equipment or materials stored on floors or roofs. Provide protection in areas where construction may damage surfaces.

3. Surfaces damaged during the construction shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the City. The Engineer shall approved the method of repairing or replacing the surface.

C. Protection of Services

1. Protect services from damage during the construction period.

2. Repair, replace and maintain utilities, facilities, or services (underground, above ground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken or otherwise rendered inoperative during construction.

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Services damaged during the construction shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault. The Engineer shall approve the method used in repairing, replacing, or maintaining the services.

D. Protection of Equipment and Materials

1. Equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner that shall maintain an orderly, clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, equipment and material shall be kept off the ground and out of standing water by means of pallets or racks and covered with tarpaulins.

2. Equipment and material, if left unprotected and damaged, shall be repainted, or otherwise refurbished at the discretion of the Owner.

Equipment and material are subject to rejection and replacement if, in the opinion of the Engineer or manufacturer the equipment has deteriorated or been damaged to the extent that its immediate use or performance is questionable, or that its normal life expectancy has been curtailed.

3. During the construction period, protect piping, fittings, valves, equipment, and associated appurtenances from damage and dirt. Each system of piping shall be flushed to remove grit, dirt, sand, and other foreign matter for as long a time as required to thoroughly clean the systems.

E. Adjustment

1. After the entire installation has been completed, make required adjustments to balancing valves, circulating systems, pressure reducing valves and similar devices until performance requirements are met.

2. Provide factory-lubricated bearings for equipment. Before initial startup of equipment, inspect and verify bearings for proper amounts of lubricant. If required, provide proper amounts of lubricant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Ferrous to non-ferrous pipe connections shall be made with threaded, soldered, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system material.

Dielectric fittings shall prevent any electrolytic action between dissimilar materials.

1.7 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make pipe connections according to the following

1. Provide unions in supply piping systems 4 inches and smaller:
a. Adjacent to each side of valve
b. At final connection to equipment

2. Provide sewer lateral cleanout:
a. As indicated on Plans.

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.8 SLEEVES AND SEALS
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized steel.

C. Sealant: refer to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Grinnell.

2. Elcen.

3. Fee and Mason.

4. Kin-Line.

5. Michigan.

6. Unistrut.

7. Or approved equal.

B. Plumbing Piping – Drain, Waste, Vent:

1. Conform to ASTM F708.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (75 mm): Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:

1. Conform to ASTM F708.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

6. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

7. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

2.2 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

HANGER ROD
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER
Inches (mm) Feet (m) Inches (mm)
1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 (2) 3/8 (9)
(12 to 32)
1-1/2 to 2 10 (3) 3/8 (9)
(38 to 50)
2-1/2 to 3 10 (3) 1/2 (13)
(62 to 75)
4 to 6 10 (3) 5/8 (15)
(100 to 150)
8 to 12 14 (4.25) 7/8 (22)
(200 to 300)
PVC (All Sizes) 6 (1.8) 3/8 (9)
C.I. Bell and
Spigot (or No-Hub) 5 (1.5) 1/2 (13)
and at Joints

2.3 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Plan and arrange overhead piping to avoid dedicated electrical space that may include motors, controllers, switchboards, panel boards, or similar equipment.

1. Dedicated electrical space is equal to the width and depth of the electrical components and extends from the floor to a height of 6 feet above the electrical components or to the structural ceiling, whichever is lower. No piping, leak detection apparatus, equipment, components, or associated SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
appurtenances foreign to the electrical installation shall be in the dedicated electrical space.

2. Dropped, suspended, or any other type of ceiling that does not add strength to the building structure cannot be provided as a separation between dedicated electrical spaces for the installation of foreign components within the dedicated electrical space.

B. Where the installation of foreign components occur above the dedicated electrical space (6 feet above the electrical systems), contractor shall provide a means of secondary containment to prevent damage to the electrical systems.

C. Secondary Containment Piping System

1. Piping system shall consist of clear unpigmented Polyvinyl Chloride pipe and fittings. The containment piping system shall be longitudinally split.

The pipe shall align via a tongue and groove and the fittings shall be manufactured in two halves.

2. The pipe and fitting shall be temporarily held together by clips affixed over top of integral fitting clip locators. Final system joining shall be provided by welding components together via an injection bonding process.

3. Final containment inspection shall be provided via a low-pressure air test per manufacturer’s requirements.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric unions shall be factory – fabricated assemblies with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

B. Dielectric flanges shall be factory – fabricated, companion flange assemblies with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

C. Dielectric flange kits shall be field – fabricated with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. Kit shall include flanges, full face type phenolic gasket, phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

D. Dielectric couplings shall be galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded ends and a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple with unert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, plain, threaded, or grooved ends and a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Watts Industries

2. Zurn Industries

3. Sioux Chief Industries
SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

C. Report in writing to the Engineer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PREPARATION - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. The use of lead-containing solder for plumbing and plumbing fixtures is prohibited in the construction of this project.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch (13 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum spacing between hangers.

SECTION 22 0500

PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0500 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

H. Provide copper plated hangers and support for copper piping.

I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

In lieu of copper plated hardware, provide non-conductive inserts.

J. Prime coat and paint exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

B. Dielectric fittings.

C. Mechanical sleeve seals.

D. Sleeves.

E. Escutcheons.

F. Plumbing demolition.

G. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

H. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirement
SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos- free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725- kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070- kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

B. Sealing Elements: EPDM NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Include two for each sealing element.

D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping as required with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.

3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than- schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Non pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

6. PVC to ABS Non pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Non pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

SECTION 22 0522

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
MILLS PARK 22 0522 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel, and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach substrates as required to support applied loads.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
MILLS PARK 22 1116 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and valve above grade and inside the building.

2. Valves.

3. Dielectric Fittings.

4. Escutcheons.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

1. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint ends.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
MILLS PARK 22 1116 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Grinnell Corporation.

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Hammond Valve.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
c. Red-White Valve Corporation.
d. NIBCO.
e. Apollo.
f. Or equal.

B. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze two-piece body, stainless or chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle solder or threaded ends. Note:

Three-piece full port ball valves are recommended up to 3”. Also recommended to add option for extended handle stem for insulated pipes.

C. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
MILLS PARK 22 1116 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
D. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
MILLS PARK 22 1116 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 64: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits.

3.4 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern.

2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections, and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved.

Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
MILLS PARK 22 1116 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate the valves and allow them to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Roof flashing assemblies.

4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

5. Flashing materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket OR cast-iron plug.

5. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.

6. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out.

SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

4. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

5. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass, or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.
b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 with backwater valve, if specified.

3. Body Material: Gray iron.

4. Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing-check type, if required, as specified.

5. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel, where required.

6. Sediment Bucket: as specified.

7. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

8. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Rough bronze.

9. Top Shape: Round.

10. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.

11. Trap primer connection.

SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.3 ACCESS PANEL
A. J. L. Industries, with cam lock closure.

B. Approved equal.

2.4 TRAP PRIMER
A. PPP, with multiple outlets.

B. Approved equal.

2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR
A. PPP.

B. Approved Equal.

2.6 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch-thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 10 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.

3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping.

SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.8 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section 22 0522 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide water hammer arrestors at end of each main / submain serving flush valve services.

G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

J. Install air-gap fittings on draining indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

L. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 22 1319 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

B. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

C. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

D. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
E. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 22 4000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Access Panel

2. Drinking Fountain

3. Floor Drain

4. Floor Sink

5. Flush Valve

6. Hand Sink

7. Hose Bibb

8. Ice Maker

9. Kitchen Sink

10. Lavatories

11. Mop Sink

12. Sink

13. Thermostatic Mixing Valve.

14. Trap Primer

15. Urinal

16. Water Closet

17. Water Heater

18. Water Hammer Arrestor
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.

2. Section 220500 - Plumbing

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements, Product Data, and Samples:

Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data:

SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 22 4000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Product Data: Provide catalogue illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. b. Provide submittals for all fixtures and equipment, and all associated trim and hardware.

B. Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals and 017900 - Demonstration and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Only accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Access Plates:
a. JL Industries.
b. Or approved equal.

2. Drinking Fountain:
a. Elkay.
b. Or approved equal.

3. Faucet (for Kitchen Sink, Lavatory, Mop Sink):
a. Chicago Faucet.
b. Zurn.
c. Or approved equal.

4. Floor Drain:
a. J. R. Smith.
b. Or approved equal.

5. Floor Sink:
a. J. R. Smith.
b. Or approved equal.

SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 22 4000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. Flush Valve:
a. Sloan.
b. Or approved equal.

7. Hand Sink:
a. Aero.
b. Or approved equal.

8. Hose Bibb:
a. ACORN.
b. Or approved equal.

9. Ice Maker
a. Koolaire.
b. Or approved equal.

10. Kitchen Sink:
a. American Standard
b. Or approved equal.

11. Lavatory
a. ACORN.
b. American Standard
c. Or approved equal.

12. Mop Sink:
a. American Standard
b. Or approved equal.

13. Sink:
a. Elkay.
b. Kohler.
c. American Standard
d. Or approved equal.

14. Thermostatic Mixing Valve:
a. Leonard.
b. Or approved equal.

15. Trap Primer:
a. MIFAB.
b. Or approved equal

16. Urinal:
a. ACORN.
b. American Standard.
c. Or approved equal.

17. Water Closet:
a. ACORN.
b. Or approved equal.

18. Water Heater:
a. American Standard.
b. Bradford White.
c. Rheem.
d. A.O. Smith.
e. Or approved equal.

SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 22 4000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

19. Water Hammer Arrestor:
a. Precision Plumbing Products.
b. Or approved equal.

B. Furnish and install Products as indicated in Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

2. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing Fixtures:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

3. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

4. Install components level and plumb.

5. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.

6. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant.

SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 22 4000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

7. Water Closets, Urinals and Lavatories: Provide adjustable cast iron fixture suppo
rts for all wall hung water closets, except where single vertical carriers in shallow walls occur.

8. The use of lead-containing solder for plumbing and plumbing fixtures is prohibited in the construction of this project.

B. Trap Primers

1. Install primers under sinks and/or lavatories, and behind access panels out of line of sight. Provide access panels

2. Trap primers to have approval of plumbing and drainage institute.

3. Install trap primers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Protective Shielding Guards

1. Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering hot- and cold-water supplies, trap and drain piping, and complying with ADA requirements and meeting ANSI code for barrier-free design. Provide at all accessible sinks and lavatories.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Refer to Specification Section 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements.

B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.5 CLEANING
A. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Field testing and inspection.

Payment for items of work covered under Division 22 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule.

No additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0500 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Basic mechanical methods.

2. Supports and anchors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Fabrication submittals: Contractor shall submit shop drawings for location of equipment and fabrication of hardware, for review by owner's representative prior to fabrication and installation.

2. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Record drawings (as-builts)
b. Start-up reports
c. Provide test and balance report.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Conform to applicable local code for support of ductwork.

1.4 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for delivery, storage, protection, installation, and materials.

B. When equipment is operable, and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so if he properly supervises the operation and retains full responsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of whether the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall professionally clean the equipment, install new filter media, make all required adjustments, and complete all punch list items before final acceptance by the representatives of the Owner.

SECTION 23 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0500 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.

D. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

E. Items exposed (in areas without ceilings) shall be installed in a neat, orderly manner. Elements shall be perpendicular and parallel to building lines.

F. In those conditions where ductwork is exposed in finished areas, careful craftsmanship and only the highest standards of installation will be acceptable.

All routing of exposed ducts, pipes, conduits, shall be approved in advance by the State Representative prior to installation.

G. Drawings and Specifications:

1. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of systems and are to be followed as far as possible. If deviations from the layout are necessitated by field conditions, detailed layouts of the proposed departures shall be submitted in writing to the Owner’s Representative, for approval before proceeding with the work.

2. This Contractor shall make all his own measurements in the field and shall be responsible for correct fitting. Contractor shall coordinate this work with all other branches in such a manner as to cause a minimum of conflict or delay.

3. Where any work is so placed as to cause or contribute to a conflict it shall be readjusted at the expense of the Contractor causing the conflict. The decision shall be final about the arrangement of ducts, piping, etc., where conflict arises.

4. Where offsets in systems are required to complete the installation, or for the proper operation of the system, these shall be deemed to be included in the Contract.

5. Significant deviations from Drawings must be approved by the Engineer of Record.

H. Locations:

1. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatic. Exact locations of ducts, pipes, and equipment may vary because of conflicts with work of other trades. Work out conflicts where relocations will not affect operation or appearance of systems.

2. Locate equipment requiring periodic servicing so that it is readily accessible. Do not back up service sides to walls, nor place it too close to other equipment to make service impractical.

SECTION 23 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0500 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES AND SEALS
A. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

C. Sealant: refer to Section 079200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

B. Report in writing to State Representative prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the State.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. The use of lead-containing solder for plumbing and plumbing fixtures is prohibited in the construction of this project.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0593 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

3. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.

4. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):

1. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):

1. Deemed acceptable in lieu of AABC, all accounts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to State Representative from Testing Laboratory, with copy to Contractor.

Prepare reports in conformance with Section 014000 - Quality Requirements:
1) Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
2) Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
3) Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side.

Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0593 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
4) Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms.
b. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
c. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. Company to be certified by one of the following.
a. AABC Certified Independent Testing and Balancing Agency. b. National Environmental Balancing Bureau Certified Independent Agency. (NEBB).

B. Certification: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports.

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent’s standard forms.

D. Contractor shall demonstrate operation of all equipment and hardware, to include economizer and CO2 monitoring with supplemental signal generators to effect performance outboard of design conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work.

Ensure the following conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed completely and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Duct systems are clean of debris.

5. Air outlets are installed and connected.

6. Duct system leakage is minimized.

3.2 PREPARATION
SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0593 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.

Make instruments available to State Representative to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing instruments as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Fan Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report.

Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by State Representative.

F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. Perform this work with cooling system energized where applicable to obtain the extra resistance of wet coils.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross- sectional area of duct.

SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MILLS PARK 23 0593 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Open volume control devices to 100%.

F. Vary total system air quantities by duct static pressure set point. Provide adjustment to set point as necessary to achieve air flows.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Ductwork insulation.

2. Duct liner.

3. Insulation jackets.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

3. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.

4. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

5. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

6. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

7. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

8. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.

9. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

10. ASTM E84 2007 Edition - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

11. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

E. California Energy Code (for materials and installation) SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data:
a. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 3 years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.

B. Materials:

1. Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Jobsite Requirements

1. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

2. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Energy efficiency:

SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Insulation: Minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.

Provide additional thickness to ensure surface temperatures are below 100 degrees and to prevent condensation on cold surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Glass Fiber, Flexible Duct Wrap

1. Manufacturers:
a. Owens/Corning, Toledo, OH (800) 438-7465.
b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) CertainTeed.
2) Schuller (Manville).
3) Knauf.
4) Or equal.

2. Insulation: ASTM C553 flexible, noncombustible blanket. a. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.30 at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. d. Density: 0.75 lb./cu ft.

3. Vapor Barrier Jacket
a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
b. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
c. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

4. Vapor Barrier Tape
a. Manufacturers:
1) Owens/Corning.
2) CertainTeed.
3) Schuller (Manville).
4) Or equal.
b. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber-based adhesive.

5. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

B. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Flexible

1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed.
b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Knauf.
2) Schuller (Manville).
3) Owens Corning.
4) Or equal.

2. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.28 at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
c. Density: 1.5 lb./cu ft.
d. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 ft./min.

3. Adhesive
a. Waterproof fire-retardant type.

4. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied with integral head.

C. Glass Fiber, Rigid Board

1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed.
b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Knauf.
2) Schuller (Manville).
3) Owens Corning.
4) Or equal.

2. Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin for rigidity.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
a. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.28 at 75 degrees F. b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
c. Density: 1.5 lb./cu ft.

3. Vapor Barrier Jacket
a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
b. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
c. Overlap seams with pressure sensitive tape.

5. Pin to ductwork below 8 feet and seal all perforations hardcast mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

3. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

B. Report in writing to Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the State.

3.2 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASHRAE

90.1. B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.

2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal end of insulation.

D. For ductwork exposed in finished spaces below 10 feet above finished floor, finish with aluminum jacket.

E. For exterior applications, provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.

F. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.

3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

SECTION 23 0713

DUCT INSULATION
MILLS PARK 23 0713 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

G. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.

Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

H. Supply air, return air, and outside air ductwork shall be lined unless explicit approval is issued in writing by representative of Owner.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Wrap Insulation Schedule:

DUCTWORK THICKNESS FINISH
Supply Ducts 1-1/2 INCH Aluminized Film
Return Ducts 1-1/2 INCH Aluminized Film
Outdoor Air Intake Ducts 1-1/2 INCH Aluminized Film
B. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation Schedule:

DUCTWORK THICKNESS FINISH
Plenums (Cooling System) 1 INCH Black Pigmented, UL
Supply Ducts 1 INCH Black Pigmented, UL
Return Ducts 1 INCH Black Pigmented, UL
Outdoor Air Intake Ducts 1 INCH Black Pigmented, UL
Ducts Exposed to Outdoors 2 INCH Black Pigmented, UL

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Metal ductwork.

2. Air turning devices.

3. Volume control dampers.

4. Duct cleaning.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 230500 - Common Work Results for HVAC

2. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

3. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation

4. Section 233713 - Diffusers Registers and Grilles

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

3. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

4. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat- Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

5. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

6. ASTM A 568 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot- Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

B. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

2. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal or Conveying.

4. NFPA 96 - Installing of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease- Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

2. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data:
a. Duct materials, duct liner, duct connectors, and flexible duct. b. Factory or shop manufactured assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.
b. Record changes in fitting location and type.
c. Show additional fittings used.
d. Actual locations of access doors, test holes, and fire dampers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A. NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Jobsite Requirements:

1. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

2. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Impact:

1. Indoor Air Quality: Install insulation so that unfaced fiberglass and mineral fiber insulation are not in the interior of the ductwork.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 having zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A569 and A568.

C. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A 167, Type 304.

D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Sealant:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Duro Dyne Corporation, Farmingdale, NY (800) 899-3876. b. H.B. Fuller Co, St. Paul, MN (888) 423-8553.
c. Hardcast, Inc, Wylie, TX (800) 527-7092.
d. Or equal.

2. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.

F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

2.2 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Semco, Inc, Columbia, MO (888) 473-6264.

2. Metal-Fab, Inc, Wichita, KS (800) 835-2830.

3. United McGill Corp, Groveport, OH (614) 836-9981.

4. Or equal.

B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc, East Monongahela, PA (800) 245-3188.

2. Ruskin Manufacturing, Kansas City, MO (816) 761-7476.

3. Semco Inc, Columbia, MO (888) 473-6264.

4. Or equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30oz per sq. yd.

2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.

3. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A. Manufacturers:

1. Louvers and Dampers, Inc, Florence, KY (606) 647-2299.

2. Prefco Products, Inc, Buckingham, PA (800) 437-6653.

3. Ruskin Manufacturing, Kansas City, MO (816) 761-7476.

4. Or equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Splitter Dampers:

1. Material: Same gage as duct up to 24 inches size in either direction and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.

2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod.

3. Operator: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter rod in self-aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw.

D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

F. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

G. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

2. Insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

2.5 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the State.

3.2 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

SECTION 23 3110

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
MILLS PARK 23 3110 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
H. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly.

I. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

J. Install so that unfaced fiberglass and mineral fiber insulation are not in the interior of the ductwork.

K. Provide transitional hardware at every tap and take-off.

L. Provide flex duct connection at HP-1 with weather covers (eyebrows). Provide flex duct connections at AC-1 supply air, return air risers.

3.3 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

C. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLATION
A. Protect installation in place prior to acceptance.

B. Clean duct work at necessary prior to acceptance.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time.

Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 QUALIFICATION OF THE HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING CONTRACTOR A. Membership: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be a certified member of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) or shall maintain membership in a nationally recognized non-profit industry organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

B. Certification: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall have a minimum of one (1) Air System Cleaning Specialist (ASCS) certified by NADCA on a full- time basis or shall have staff certified by a nationally recognized certification program and organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

C. Supervisor Qualifications: A person certified as an ASCS by NADCA or maintaining an equivalent certification by a nationally recognized program and organization, shall be responsible for the total work herein specified.

D. Experience: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall submit records of experience in the field of HVAC system cleaning as requested by the Owner.

E. Equipment, Materials and Labor: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall possess and furnish all necessary equipment, materials, and labor to adequately perform the specified services.

1. The contractor shall assure that its employees have received safety equipment training, medical surveillance programs, individual health protection measures, and manufacturer’s product and material safety data sheets (MSDS) as required for the work by the U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and as described by this specification. For work performed in countries outside of the U.S.A, contractors should comply with applicable national safety codes and standards.

2. The contractor shall always maintain a copy of all current MSDS documentation and safety certifications at the site, as well as comply with all other site documentation requirements of applicable OSHA programs and this specification.

3. Contractor shall submit to the Owner all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemical products proposed to be used in the cleaning process.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Licensing: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall provide proof of maintaining the proper license(s), if any, as required to do work in this state.

Contractor shall comply with all Federal, state, and local rules, regulations, and licensing requirements.

1.2 STANDARDS
A. NADCA Standards: The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall perform the services specified here in accordance with the current published standards of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA).

1. All terms in this specification shall have their meaning defined as stated in the NADCA Standards.

2. NADCA Standards must be followed with no modifications or deviations being allowed.

B. Applicable Standards and Publications: The following current standards and publications of the issues currently in effect form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by any reference thereto:

1. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): Assessment, Cleaning & Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR 2005), 2004.

2. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): Understanding Microbial Contamination in HVAC Systems, 1996.

3. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): Introduction to HVAC System Cleaning Services, 2004.

4. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): Standard 05 Requirements for the Installation of Service Openings in HVAC Systems, 2004.

5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL Standard 181.

6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Standard 62-89, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

7. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Building Air Quality,@ December 1991.

8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 1985.

9. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA): Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Air Duct Systems, 1993.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

2.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Scope: This section defines the minimum requirements necessary to render existing HVAC components clean for re-use, and to verify the cleanliness through inspection and/or testing in accordance with items specified herein and applicable NADCA Standards.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system in strict accordance with these specifications.

C. The HVAC system includes any interior surface of the facility’s air distribution system for conditioned spaces and/or occupied zones. This includes the entire heating, air-conditioning, and ventilation system from the points where the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system.

The return air grilles, return air ducts to the air handling unit (AHU), the interior surfaces of the AHU, mixing box, coil compartment, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, supply air ducts, fans, fan housing, fan blades, air wash systems, spray eliminators, turning vanes, filters, filter housings, reheat coils, and supply diffusers are all considered part of the HVAC system.

The HVAC system may also include other components such as dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and make-up air systems.

2.2 HVAC SYSTEM COMPONENT INSPECTIONS AND SITE PREPARATIONS A. HVAC System Component Inspections: Prior to the commencement of any cleaning work, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall perform a visual inspection of the HVAC system to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required to satisfactorily complete this project. The cleanliness inspection should include air handling units and representative areas of the HVAC system components and ductwork. In HVAC systems that include multiple air handling units, a representative sample of the units should be inspected. The cleanliness inspection shall be conducted without negatively impacting the indoor environment through excessive disruption of settled dust, microbial amplification, or other debris. In cases where contamination is suspected, and/or in sensitive environments where even small amounts of contaminant may be of concern, environmental engineering control measures should be implemented.

1. Damaged system components found during the inspection shall be documented and brought to the attention of the Owner.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Site Evaluation and Preparations: Contractor shall conduct a site evaluation, and establish a specific, coordinated plan which details how each area of the building will be protected during the various phrases of the project.

C. Inspector Qualifications: Qualified personnel should perform the HVAC cleanliness inspection to determine the need for cleaning, at minimum, such personnel should have an understanding of HVAC system design, and experience in utilizing accepted indoor environmental sampling practices, current industry HVAC cleaning procedures, and applicable industry standards.

2.3 GENERAL HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
A. Containment: Debris removed during cleaning shall be collected and precautions must be taken to ensure that Debris is not otherwise dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.

B. Particulate Collection: Where the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting inside the building, HEPA filtration with 99.97% collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or greater) particles shall be used. When the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the building, Mechanical Cleaning operations shall be undertaken only with Particulate Collection Equipment in place, including adequate filtration to contain Debris removed from the HVAC system. When the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the building, precautions shall be taken to locate the equipment down wind and away from all air intakes and other points of entry into the building.

C. Controlling Odors: Measures shall be employed to control odors and/or mist vapors during the cleaning process.

D. Component Cleaning: Cleaning methods shall be employed such that all HVAC system components must be Visibly Clean as defined in applicable standards (see NADCA Standards). Upon completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning operations.

E. Air-Volume Control Devices: Dampers and any air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system must have their position marked prior to cleaning and, upon completion, must be restored to their marked position.

F. Service Openings: The contractor shall utilize service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry, and inspection.

1. Contractor shall utilize the existing service openings already installed in the HVAC system where possible.

2. Other openings shall be created where needed and they must be created so they can be sealed in accordance with industry codes and standards.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Closures must not significantly hinder, restrict, or alter the airflow within the system.

4. Closures must be properly insulated to prevent heat loss/gain or condensation on surfaces within the system.

5. Openings must not compromise the structural integrity of the system.

6. Construction techniques used in the creation of openings should conform to requirements of applicable building and fire codes, and applicable NFPA, SMACNA and NADCA Standards.

7. Cutting service openings into flexible duct is not permitted. Flexible duct shall be disconnected at the ends as needed for proper cleaning and inspection.

8. Rigid fiber glass duct systems shall be resealed in accordance with NAIMA recommended practices. Only closure techniques that comply with UL Standard 181 or UL Standard 181a are suitable for fiber glass duct system closures.

9. All service openings capable of being re-opened for future inspection or remediation shall be clearly marked and shall have their location reported to the Owner in project report documents.

G. Ceiling sections (tile): The contractor may remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access to HVAC systems during the cleaning process.

H. Air distribution devices (registers, grilles & diffusers): The contractor shall clean all air distribution devices.

I. Air handling units, terminal units (VAV, Dual duct boxes, etc.), blowers and exhaust fans: The contractor shall insure that supply, return, and exhaust fans and blowers are thoroughly cleaned. Areas to be cleaned include blowers, fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades, or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assembles. All visible surface contamination deposits shall be removed in accordance with NADCA Standards. Contractor shall:

1. Clean all air handling units (AHU) internal surfaces, components and condensate collectors and drains.

2. Assure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash down procedures.

3. Clean all coils and related components, including evaporator fins.

J. Duct Systems. Contractor shall:

1. Create service openings in the system as necessary to accommodate cleaning of otherwise inaccessible areas.

2. Mechanically clean all duct systems to remove all visible contaminants, such that the systems can pass Cleaning Verification Tests (see NADCA Standards).

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.4 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Safety Standards: Cleaning contractors shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local requirements for protecting the safety of the contractor’s employees, building occupants, and the environment. All applicable standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) shall be followed when working in accordance with this specification.

B. Occupant Safety: No processes or materials shall be employed in such a manner that they will introduce additional hazards into occupied spaces.

C. Disposal of Debris: All Debris removed from the HVAC System shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local requirements.

2.5 MECHANICAL CLEANING METHODOLOGY
A. Source Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using Source Removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and safely remove contaminants from the facility. It is the contractor’s responsibility to select Source Removal methods that will render the HVAC system Visible Clean and capable of passing cleaning verification methods (See applicable NADCA Standards) and other specified test, in accordance with all general requirements. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used which could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

1. All methods used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. A vacuum device shall be connected to the downstream end of the section being cleaned through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the indoor environment are assured.

2. All vacuum devices exhausting air inside the building shall be equipped with HEPA filters (minimum efficiency), including hand-held vacuums and wet-vacuums.

3. All vacuum devices exhausting air outside the facility shall be equipped with Particulate Collection including adequate filtration to contain Debris removed from the HVAC system. Such devices shall exhaust in a manner that will not allow contaminants to re-enter the facility. Release of debris outdoors must not violate any outdoor environmental standards, codes, or regulations.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. All methods require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris adhered to interior HVAC system surfaces, such that debris may be safely conveyed to vacuum collection devices. Acceptable methods will include those which will not potentially damage the integrity of the ductwork, nor damage porous surface materials such as liners inside the ductwork or system components.

B. Methods of Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Components

1. Fibrous glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in any equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment, while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure, and not permitted to get wet in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and recommendations.

2. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous glass components and will render the system capable of passing Cleaning Verification Tests (see NADCA Standards).

C. Damaged Fibrous Glass Material

1. Evidence of damage: If there is any evidence of damage, deterioration, delaminating, friable material, mold or fungus growth, or moisture such that fibrous glass materials cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable insulation repair coating, they shall be identified for replacement.

2. Replacement: When requested or specified, Contractor must be capable of remediating exposed damaged insulation in air handlers and/or ductwork requiring replacement.

3. Replacement material: In the event fiber glass materials must be replaced, all materials shall conform to applicable industry codes and standards, including those of UL and SMACNA. Replacement of damaged insulation is not covered by this specification.

D. Cleaning of coils

1. Any cleaning method may be used which will render the Coil Visibly Clean and capable of passing Coil Cleaning Verification (see applicable NADCA Standards). Coil drain pans shall be subject to Non-Porous Surfaces Cleaning Verification. The drain for the condensate drains pan shall be operational. Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, displacement of, inhibit heat transfer, or erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall conform to coil manufacturer recommendations when available. Coils shall be thoroughly rinsed with clean water to remove any latent residues.

E. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings

1. Antimicrobial agents shall only be applied if active fungal growth is suspected, or where unacceptable levels of fungal contamination have been verified through testing.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Application of any antimicrobial agents used to control the growth of fungal or bacteriological contaminants shall be performed after the removal of surface deposits and debris.

3. When used, antimicrobial treatments and coatings shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations and EPA registration listing.

4. Antimicrobial coatings shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. Coatings shall be sprayed directly onto interior ductwork surfaces, rather than fogged downstream onto surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION
A. General: Verification of HVAC System cleanliness will be determined after mechanical cleaning and before the application of any treatment or introduction of any treatment-related substance to the HVAC system, including biocidal agents and coatings.

B. Visual Inspection: The HVAC system shall be inspected visually to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

1. If no contaminants are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean; however, the Owner reserves the right to further verify system cleanliness through Surface Comparison Testing or the NADCA vacuum test specified in the NADCA standards.

2. If visible contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

3. NADCA vacuum test analysis should be performed by a qualified third party experienced in testing of this nature.

C. Verification of Coil Cleaning

1. Cleaning must restore the coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of the pressure drop measured when the coil was first installed. If the original pressure drop is not known, the coil will be considered clean only if the coil is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on a thorough visual inspection (see NADCA Standards).

3.2 PRE-EXISTING SYSTEM DAMAGE
A. Contractor is not responsible for problems resulting from prior inappropriate or careless cleaning techniques of others.

SECTION 23 3200

AIR DUCT CLEANING
MILLS PARK 23 3200 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 POST INSTALLATION / PRE-ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Measure as identified herein shall be provided for portions of installation showing deterioration for time and damage therein after installation.

3.4 POST-PROJECT REPORT
B. At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor shall provide a report to the Owner indicating the following:

1. Success of the cleaning project, as verified through visual inspection and/or gravimetric analysis.

2. Areas of the system found to be damaged and/or in need of repair.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
MILLS PARK 23 3713 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Diffusers.

2. Registers / Grilles.

3. Door Louver.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 9123 – Interior Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Diffusion Council (ADC):

1. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):

1. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

C. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

1. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
MILLS PARK 23 3713 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project.

Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.

C. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of three years documented experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Titus.

2. Ruskin.

3. Tuttle & Bailey.

4. Or equal.

2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS (TITUS MCD)
A. Type: Square, fabricated assemblies, modular core diffuser to discharge air in adjustable patterns.

B. Frame: Surface mount, Snap-in, Inverted T-bar, or Spline type as scheduled on plans.

C. Fabrication: Steel or Aluminum with baked enamel, “off-white” finish.

D. Accessories: Opposed blade damper adjustable for removal of Core. Only if specifically shown on drawings.

SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
MILLS PARK 23 3713 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Insulation: Back plate covered with glass fiber insulation with an aluminum foil vapor barrier to prevent harmful effects of condensation.

2.3 SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES (TITUS 300RL)
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4-inch minimum depth, 3/4-inch maximum spacing, with adjustable double deflection blades, with long blades front.

B. Frame: 1-1/4-inch margin with concealed mounting.

C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel, and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel, “off-white” finish.

D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, parallel blade type with protruding tab operator, operable from face.

E. Insulation: Back plate covered with glass fiber insulation with an aluminum foil vapor barrier to prevent harmful effects of condensation.

2.4 CEILING EXHAUST REGISTERS/GRILLES (TITUS 350RS)
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4-inch minimum depth, 3/4-inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, short side front.

B. Frame: 1-1/4-inch margin with concealed mounting.

D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.

E. Insulation: Back plate covered with glass fiber insulation with an aluminum foil vapor barrier to prevent harmful effects of condensation.

2.5 DOOR LOUVRE (RUSKIN ELF365DX)
A. Type: Stationary louver.

B. Frame: 4” deep, flange – mounted, as scheduled on plans.

C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel, finish per General Contractor.

SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
MILLS PARK 23 3713 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Accessories: ¼” mesh screen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate location of outlets and inlets with Architectural reflected ceiling plan and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and electrical lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 9123.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 5732

HVAC EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 23 5732 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units (AC-1)

2. Rooftop Exhaust Fan (EF-3).

3. Cabinet Exhaust Fan (EF-1, 2, 4, 5, 6).

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 3110 – HVAC Ducts and Casings

2. Section 23 5900 – HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

3. Division 26 - Electrical

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

D. UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Packaged Rooftop AC Unit (AC-1): Single-packaged, self-contained, factory- assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet and frame, evaporator fan, evaporator-coil, condenser coil, condenser fan, compressor, controls and filters in draw-through air flow configuration.

B. Roof Ventilator Exhaust Fan (EF-3): Spun aluminum shroud, curb-mounted unit, consisting of motor and fan on mounts, wiring and terminations, and for rooftop installation.

C. Ceiling Cabinet Exhaust Fan (EF-1,2,4,5,6): Ceiling-mounted cabinet, consisting of motor and fan on mounts, wiring and terminations, in-line installation.

SECTION 23 5732

HVAC EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 23 5732 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, Product Data, and Samples:

Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured Units. Indicate performance capacities, energy-efficiency ratings, and electrical characteristics.

2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for manufactured Units. Indicate pipe connections, ductwork connections, filter and media size and quantity, condensate drain connection, thermostatic valves, temperature controls connections and electrical rough-in connections with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

3. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified
qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Plan view of installed location of Units
b. Elevation or section view of installed Units.

2. Warranty: Submit written minimum five (5) years warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors condenser and evaporator with forms completed in Owner name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.

3. Extra Products: Submit extra products as specified in this Section.

4. Operating instruction: Document training by furnishing a sign-in sheet with a description of the training provided instructors name and organization, and those who received training. Refer to 01780 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 for more specific training

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

SECTION 23 5732

HVAC EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 23 5732 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Unit (AC-1).
a. Carrier.
b. Approved equal.

2. Rooftop Exhaust Fan (EF-3).
a. Loren Cook.
b. Approved equal.

3. Rooftop Exhaust Fan (EF-1,2,4,5,6).
a. Loren Cook.
b. Approved equal.

B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.

Substitutions: Permitted providing equal quality and performance, and as agreed to by Engineer.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Grade of equipment as manufactured by respective manufacturers, for products as identified herein and on drawings, and for performances, capacities, and efficiencies as scheduled, and with accessories, options, ancillaries, and trim as noted.

B. Provide additional hardware as required for complete operating system as identified on plan.

SECTION 23 5732

HVAC EQUIPMENT
MILLS PARK 23 5732 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available.

C. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

D. Report in writing to Owner prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount equipment and hardware with exterior components to provide water-tight installations.

B. Install equipment level and square and plumb and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Provide ancillaries and trim as required for complete system operation, to include refrigerant piping, control wiring and cable, et al.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Field testing and inspection.

B. Operating Instruction

1. Provide on-site instruction to review the operation of the system and detail any common troubleshooting or maintenance that is required to ensure normal operation.

2. Provide one complete set of equipment operating, installation, and programming manuals that will remain at the installed location.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 5900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 23 5900 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. AC-1, HP-1 system thermostat.

2. EF-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 control circuiting.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 5732 – HVAC Equipment.

2. Division 1 - Commissioning Requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements, Product Data, and Samples:

Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system. Submittals shall be furnished as a complete package prior to installation.

4. Operating Instruction: Document training by furnishing a sign-in sheet with a description of the training provided; instructors name and organization, and those who received training. Refer to 0780 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 for more specific training requirements.

B. Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for close- out submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:

SECTION 23 5900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 23 5900 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors.

2. Submit written special warranty with forms completed in Owner name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated and suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Carrier (for AC-1, HP-1).

2. Loren Cook (for EF-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

3. Approved Equal.

B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.

Substitutions: Permitted providing equal quality and performance, and as agreed to by Engineer.

C. Submit proposed hardware and material, and sequence of operations to owner for approval as part of bid submittal.

SECTION 23 5900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 23 5900 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. System shall provide equipment and hardware as indicated on the plans, and as necessary to execute functions as indicated in the sequence of operations as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

B. Report in writing to Owner prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. At contract award, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide new control wiring as required for proper operation. Coordinate requirements for line voltage services, as necessary.

B. Provide all necessary transformers, relays, contactors, and other options as required for proper operation.

C. Coordinate line voltage (115V) service (conduit and wire) as necessary.

D. Provide low-voltage. All exposed wire and cable shall be installed in manufactured raceways.

E. Microprocessor thermostats shall be wall-mounted with finish work, mounting beauty rings, et al as necessary for finished presentation

3.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Supplier shall demonstrate system operability on a item-by-item and component-by-component basis to the owner's representative prior to acceptance by the owner.

SECTION 23 5900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 23 5900 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. The temperature control system is to maintain space temperature settings, within plus or minus 1-degree F. of space thermostat settings, inside air.

C. Where outside air capability is provided, set minimum position to be at 5 percent when fan is ON.

D. Operation Instruction

1. Provide 1 hour of instruction to facility manager for operation of microprocessor-based thermostats.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing and installing all l, materials, equipment, fixtures and performing all labor and operations for complete and operable systems.

B. Provide all new materials, unless noted otherwise, of the best quality, and in perfect condition, and materials of the same make and quality throughout the work and as hereinafter specified. Comply with the requirements of ASTM, NEMA, U.L., and NBFM for materials and equipment.

C. The intent of these specifications is to establish a standard of quality of materials installed. Include materials as specified without exception in the Base Bid. Submit for approval any proposed substitution, complete descriptive, technical, and cost comparison data, and test reports. Do not furnish or install any substitute items without written approval at the time of contract signing. Reimburse the Owner for any additional engineering charges and for any changes in the work of other trades resulting from substitutions. List proposed substitutions on the Bid Form, stating the reasons for substitution. When requested by the Architect or Electrical Engineer, samples, electrically wired at 120V. with plug, or system demonstrations of both specified and proposed items will be submitted for inspection at the Electrical Engineer’s office and at a time convenient to all concerned parties.

D. Where a substitution alters the design or space requirements indicated on the plans, Contractor is responsible for all additional cost for Engineering to revise plans.

E. Verifying Drawings and Job Conditions:

1. Examine all drawings and specifications in a manner to be fully familiar of all work required.

2. Visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where existing conditions differ from drawings, make adjustments and allowances for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of the drawings and specifications.

F. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit drawings in one set accompanied by letter of transmittal listing the number and dates of the drawings submitted.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Mark the drawings submitted with the name of the project, numbered consecutively, and bearing approval as evidence that the drawings have been checked. Any drawings submitted without this approval will be returned for resubmission.

3. Submit Shop drawings on, but not limited to, the following:
a. Panels
b. Lighting Fixtures
c. Product List
d. Time switches
G. Drawings of Record:

Provide and keep up-to-date, a complete record set of blue line prints.

Show every change from the original drawings. Keep this set of prints on the job site and use only as a record set. Do not make changes in the layout without definite instruction in each case. Obtain a set of Contract Drawings from Architect and incorporate all changes as noted on the record set of prints. Deliver this set to the Architect upon completion and acceptance of work.

H. Accuracy of Plans and Specifications:

Plans and/or specifications showing deviation from standard practice methods or from compliance with codes, and/or any omissions, does not relieve the responsibility of furnishing, making or installing all items required by code and/or intended for the function of the system.

I. Permits, Fees, and Insurance:

Obtain and pay for all insurance, permits, etc. necessary for this Contract.

J. Codes and Regulations:

All work performed under this Section of the Specifications complies with the rules and regulations of the Division of Industrial Safety, State of California, as set forth in the latest edition of the Electrical Safety Orders, the National Electrical Code, NFPA, and all rules and regulations of local codes having jurisdiction, including the presently adopted edition Title 21 and 24 California Administrative Code.

K. Testing and Adjustment:

Test all circuits, outlets, switches, lights, motors, circuit breakers and any other electrical equipment, upon completion of all electrical work.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
L. Guarantees of Materials and Workmanship:

Furnish and install all materials under this Contract, new and free from all defects, and guaranteed for a period of two years from the date of acceptance of the work. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective material or faulty workmanship, furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without additional cost to the Contract.

Correct any defective material or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of installation immediately, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

M. Removal of Rubbish:

Remove rubbish, excess materials, tools, or equipment related to this por- tion of the work, frequently during construction and upon completion of the work.

N. Drawings and Specifications:

1. The electrical drawings are considered as part of these specifications, and any work or materials shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be as if specifically mentioned in both.

2. The data herein specified and shown on the drawings is as exact as could be prepared, but their extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and specifications are for assistance and guidance. The installation is as shown and specified. The exact location of the equipment, material, apparatus, and devices as well as the distances and levels, are more or less governed by the physical conditions and arrangements of the building. Accept this Contract with this understanding.

3. Make minor changes, when ordered by the Architect,
accommodating the installation of the work with other sections of the Contract without additional cost to the Contract.

O. Safety Conditions:

It is the Contractor's responsibility to prevent any damages to personnel and/or property resulting from contact with new or existing energized cir- cuits, switches, circuit breakers, or other electrical apparatus. All electrical work to be constructed with electrical systems de-energized in the area of work.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
P. Final Inspection and Acceptance:

After all requirements of the specifications and drawings have been fully completed, a representative of the Owner will inspect the work. Provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item or system involved to the complete satisfaction of each representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS:

A. Provide the automatic circuit breaker type, quick-make and quick-break panelboards. Provide wiring gutter sides, top and bottom.

B. Provide panelboards from the same manufacturers as the main switchboard; type, mounting, and size as noted on the drawings with silver-plated copper bussing.

C. Where space is called for on the panelboard schedules, provide space and mounting for future circuit breaker installation as indicated.

D. Use trims having doors equipped with flush type combination lock and catch, two milled type keys supplied with each panel, all locks are keyed alike. Provide a clear covered directory frame with a typed identification card, indicating type of circuit and location, in accordance with final circuitry and panel designation on each door. Completely fill in all panel directories, using actual connections, Owner’s designations, or other factual information. Key all doors to Yale LL803, or as directed by Owner.

E. Where called for on the drawings, provide a separate compartment within the panelboards for contactors and/or time switches.

2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

Provide circuit breakers with inverse time characteristic thermal and magnetic tripping elements, with an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 amperes or as specified per the Panel Schedule (the greater amount shall prevail), UL labeled, NEMA rated, molded case type. Use common trip single handle multi- pole breakers. Handle extensions are not permitted. All circuit breakers will have covers sealed on non-interchangeable trip breakers and trip unit covers sealed in interchangeable trip breakers to prevent tampering. Be sure the circuit breaker current rating markings clearly visible after breaker is installed. One manufacturer for all circuit breakers for a given panel. Provide bolt-on circuit breakers unless specifically noted on electrical drawings.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.3 POWER DISCONNECT SWITCHES:

A. Provide power disconnect switches having product construction requirements as specified and/or indicated. Where not otherwise indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Enclosure: NEMA 1, surface type in dry locations. Use NEMA 3R for exterior locations.

2. Ratings: Voltage, ampacity, horsepower, and inductive ratings complying with power source voltage and characteristics of load controlled.

3. Mechanism: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, with voidable interlock to prevent opening enclosure in "ON" position. External lockable handle operation with provision for not less than two padlocks.

4. Poles and Fusing: Comply with load requirements. Provide unfused switches except where fusing is indicated or required to comply with Code Requirements. Where fuses are installed, use dual-element time delay fuses.

B. Provide power disconnect switches of the following manufacturers with characteristics complying with load and power source indicated:

1. Westinghouse: Type HF or HU.

2. General Electric: Type TH.

3. Square D: Type HD or HU.

C. Provide the number of poles necessary to include a pole for each ungrounded conductor. Equip switch with neutral terminal point where neutral is present. Do not switch neutral unless indicated.

2.4 RELAYS:

Install control relays for automatic controls or for interlocking as indicated in the drawings. Provide relays with the number and type of poles and with operating coils as indicated. Equip relays with contacts rated not less than 15 amperes for continuous inductive load, unless otherwise shown or specified. Rate operating coils for continuous duty at the operating voltage shown on the drawings.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.5 FUSES:

A. Provide (in a location designated by the Owner) a spare fuse cabinet with the following:

1. Nameplate "spare fuses".

2. Necessary fuse holders.

3. Spare set of each size and type of fuses.

B. Provide dual element fuses for all 600 volt or lower voltage requirements unless otherwise indicated or specified. Where fuses are not made for this application, furnish Buss "Limitron" or approved equal fuses.

C. Provide Bussman Fuses as indicated on plans.

D. Replace fuses "blown" or damaged during construction with new fuses of proper rating and type for the particular use, replace spare sets.

2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURES:

Furnish, install, and connect lighting fixtures of type designed on the plans.

A. Verify all fixture locations with Architectural drawings prior to rough in.

B. Where there is conflict in fixture quantities on any of the plans the greatest amount will prevail. The description of the lighting fixture supersedes the catalog number and is to be furnished and installed with type to fit description.

2.7 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:

A. Rigid Conduit (RGS): Hot dipped galvanized or sherardized steel.

Republic Steel Co. or approved equal. Intermediate metal conduit may be used, where CEC allows, in lieu of RGS.

B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Welded, electro-galvanized thin wall steel tubing. All couplings are gland compression type.

C. Non-metallic conduit (PVC): Polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40 or 80. Install a copper ground wire, sized per National Electrical Code, in all non- metallic conduit power raceways. Use PVC in underground installations only.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel with exterior, molded polyvinyl jacket. Use for all final connections to all vibrating equipment, transformers, and the like. 18" maximum. Provide a code sized ground wire.

E. Flexible metallic steel tubing: Liquid tight without a nonmetallic jacket.

Use as allowed by code and were permitted by this Specification, section

3.06.C. Provide a code sized ground conductor.

F. Condulet Type Fittings: As manufactured by Crouse Hinds Company, Appleton Electric Company or Pyle National or approved equal, smooth inside and out, taper threaded with integral bushings.

2.8 CONDUCTORS:

A. Provide copper conductors, 600-volt A.C. unless noted otherwise.

Aluminum conductors are not permitted.

B. Use THWN conductors for underground and damp locations, THHN for dry areas.

C. Deliver conductors to the site in unbroken packages, marked with the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, voltage, and classification letters. Use only wire recently manufactured (10 months or less).

D. Provide signal service and low voltage control conductors as specified or noted on the drawings.

E. No conductor supplying 120 volts or more will be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

F. Fixture wire to comply with latest requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters. The carrying capacity of the wire as per the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code. No fixture wire may be smaller than #18 gauge. Protect wiring with tape or tubing at all points where abrasion is likely to occur.

G. Install all conductors of each electrical system in an approved raceway.

Factory assemblies, non-metallic/pliable/corrugated raceways, type UF cable or multi-conductor assemblies are not approved.

H. Use solid conductor, size #10 AWG and smaller, stranded for #8 AWG and larger.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.9 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:

Above grade level, provide galvanized junction and pull boxes with removable covers, secured with machine screws. The sizes of all boxes determined by the number and size of conductors entering the box, and by the sizes of conduit terminating in the box. All boxes conform to the applicable Electrical Safety Orders, State of California. Pullboxes flush with grade shall be concrete, with bolt down concrete or steel covers, per plans, with engraved or beadweld identification.

2.10 OUTLET BOXES:

A. Provide galvanized outlet boxes and covers, one piece pressed steel, knockout fixture outlets equipped with 3/8" fixture studs and plaster rings.

B. Where standard boxes are not suitable, provide boxes of special design to fit space.

C. Cast aluminum or cast iron for outlet boxes exposed to weather, in damp locations, or surface mounted with threaded hubs for conduit connections; cover made watertight with gasket and non-ferrous screws.

D. Provide outlet boxes in plaster covered walls with raised covers or plaster rings to finish flush with plaster.

2.11 SWITCHES:

A. Local single pole switches: Flush tumbler type A.C. rated quiet type, heavy duty, back or side wired with binding screws, 20A, 120/277V rated switches, Bryant #4901, Hubbell or Leviton #1221, Sierra #5021, or Arrow Hart #1991. Two pole, three-way and lock type of the same manufacturer, white.

B. Horsepower rated and approved for motor control service on switches controlling or disconnecting single-phase motor loads in excess of 1/3 h.p.

Switches complete with overload devices of proper motor nameplate rating.

C. Local single pole dimmer switches: Flush tumbler type with slide adjustment. 0-10 volt, back or side wired with binding screws, 20A, 120/277V rated
SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.12 RECEPTACLES:

A. Convenience outlets consist of a duplex convenience receptacle mounted in an outlet box in the wall, flush with the finish surface and complete with plate.

B. Receptacles for convenience outlets: Standard duplex, 3-wire grounding type 15 ampere, 125 volt, Hubbell, Bryant, Leviton, or Arrow Hart #5262 white, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Weatherproof G.F.C.I. receptacles: 15 ampere, 2P 3-wire grounding type, 125 volt with gray fiberglass lift cover plate, Hubbell #GF5262, unless otherwise shown on plans.

2.13 PLATES:

Provide stainless steel plates for all switches, convenience outlets, telephone outlets and all other similar outlets, unless otherwise specified or noted.

2.14 NAMEPLATES:

Shall be micarta or lamacoid plate, 1/8" thick and have approved size, with beveled edges and engraved white letters on black background. Provide nameplates for all items of electrical equipment as well as circuits in the service distribution and power distribution panelboards; lighting distribution panelboards; separately mounted motor starting switches; disconnect switches; motor control pushbutton stations and other similar devices. Each nameplate as approved by the Architect. Use two machine screws for attachment. Cement/adhesive is not approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 If construction of building reveals that any part of the Electrical Work would not be readily accessible if installed according to drawings, notify the Architect before proceeding with such installation.

3.2 All concrete work such as pull boxes, raised pads, conduit envelopes and other areas where affecting Electrical Work are the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 Coordinate layout and installation of electrical work with the overall construction schedule and work schedules of various trades to prevent delay in completion of the project.

A. Verify dimensions and information regarding accurate location of equipment, structural limitations, and finish with other affected sections.

B. Job Conditions:

The drawings do not always show offsets, bends, special fittings, or junctions or pull boxes necessary to meet job conditions. Provide the items as required at no cost to the Owner.

C. Weatherproof Equipment:

Use weather resistant electrical devices or equipment located in damp, semi-exposed areas. Comply with NEMA Type 3R requirements for enclosures.

D. Where devices are shown diagrammatically in the same location, neatly group them together in a reasonable manner. Provide one-piece plate where such is manufactured.

3.4 Equipment requiring electrical under other sections is part of the Contract. Work includes all necessary connections.

3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:

Excavate and backfill in accordance with section in these documents covering that work.

3.6 CONDUIT:

A. Install all conduit concealed, except where specifically indicated as exposed. Use rigid galvanized steel or I.M.C. for all exposed conduit. Paint with two coats to match adjacent surroundings, if viewed by the public.

B. Use galvanized rigid steel on all conduit installed in concrete and masonry walls, 3/4 inch trade size minimum, unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the plans. Verify conduit runs in concrete slab, prior to placement. Otherwise, do not run conduits in slabs.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. All conduit installed in the dry walls or dry ceilings of the building structures, shall be steel tube (EMT), except that in certain locations and for certain runs where it is impractical to install EMT, and where permission to do so has been given by the Architect, galvanized flexible steel conduit may be used, with a code sized ground conductor.

D. Run conduit so as not to interfere with or contact other piping, fixtures, or equipment. Maintain 6" separation from water piping.

E. Cut the ends of all conduit square and carefully ream out to full size, and shoulder in fitting.

F. No running threads will be permitted in locations exposed to the weather, in concrete or underground. Use special watertight union fittings in these locations.

G. Use PVC Schedule 40 or 80 for all underground conduits. Install all underground conduit at a depth of not less than 24 inches below the final finish grade, unless under concrete slabs or otherwise noted and/or specified. provide metallic high voltage tape buried 12” above conduit, except under floor slab or under concrete walk, in which case, install 6" below bottom of slab. Use IMC for all horizontal and vertical sweeps or risers with factory applied PVC coating. Verify with serving utilities for service conduits, bends, depth below grade, backfill, etc. for specific types. Schedule 80 PVC sweeps are permitted for conduits 4" diameter and greater.

H. Cut and patch all pavements, curbs, sidewalks, and gutters, whenever necessary for laying conduit, or whenever damaged by the operations of this trade. Replace materials with quality and finish equal to that removed or damaged.

I. Where conduit extends through roof to equipment on roof areas, provide weatherproofing as specified in the appropriate section of these Specifications.

J. Support all conduit in intervals not less than 10'-0" and within 36 inches from any outlet and at each side of bends and elbows. Use galvanized, concealed conduit supports, heavy stamped, one hole malleable conduit clamps secured with nails. On exposed conduit supports, use two hole clamps with screws, or galvanized steel framed channels secured by screws may be used for conduit supports. Perforated iron for supporting conduit is not permitted.

K. Use rigid galvanized steel or I.M.C., threaded, for exposed conduit runs.

Install parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersection SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
of vertical plane and ceilings. Avoid field made bends and offsets where possible. Do not install crushed or deformed raceways.

L. Provide metal sleeves and install where conduit passes through masonry or concrete walls. Use No. 20 gauge galvanized steel sleeves, no more than 1/2 inch greater in diameter than the outside diameter of the conduit.

Caulk conduit into sleeves with stone wool, Duseal or Oakum and weatherproof below grade. Where conduit passes through fire resistive walls, partitions, and floors, pack void spaces between conduits with U.S.G. Thermafiber or equal, as approved by the State Fire Marshal.

M. Provide a heavy nylon cord pull rope in all empty conduits for future use.

Leave in place for future use in all runs and tagged with plastic tag at terminating end indicating the location of the opposite end of the conduit.

N. Use factory-manufactured ells, except where noted otherwise. Field bends are permitted for EMT conduit less than 1" diameter. Conduit radius for signal system is ten times the internal diameter of the conduit.

O. Cap or seal all conduit ends until wires are pulled.

P. Use watertight gland compression type connectors and couplings on fittings for thin wall metallic conduit. Screw type or crimp type are not permitted.

Q. Wire all rotating electrical equipment with flexible, liquid-tight conduit with appropriate slack from disconnect switch to equipment.

R. Install expansion coupling at all expansion joint locations, refer to Architectural. Drawings for locations.

S. Use approved type-bending machines for PVC conduits. Use of blow torch is prohibited.

T. For grouping, use conduit trapezes made up of suitable Unistrut or Kindorf hangers.

U. Seal or cap all conduit for a watertight installation.

V. Use approved conductor pulling machines for all underground conduits.

Use of truck is prohibited.

3.7 OUTLET BOXES:

A. Attach outlet boxes on metal studs with TEC screws. Use wood screws for attachment on wood studs. Nails are not acceptable.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Cover all boxes with outlet box protector, Appleton SB-CK or approved equal. Keep plaster and dirt from entering box or panels. If plaster does get in, removed it prior to pulling in wires.

C. Close all unused openings with plugs.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS:

A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, do not install conductors of less than No. 12 AWG size. For control conductors protected by 15 ampere or lower overcurrent protection, No. 14 AWG conductors will be installed.

Where approved by Code, remote control and signal circuits utilize No. 18 or No. 16 AWG sizes. Increase No. 12 to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt home runs exceeding 75 feet.

B. Color code power wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits.

C. Install all electrical conductors, including signal and communications circuits in an approved raceway.

D. Neatly group conductors in panels, switchgear and terminal cabinets, etc., and form in a manner to fan into terminals with regular spacing. Lace formed groups of conductors with No. 12 waxed twine, or Panduit Co.

Nylon Straps Numbers "SST-4-H" or "SST-2". Lace larger conductors with marlin and secure with cleats, or Panduit Co. Nylon Sta-Straps Numbers "SSC-4-H" and tie anchors ETA-1, TA-2, or TM-1-2-3.

E. Install U.L. approved covered wire from all lighting fixture lamp sockets into outlet or junction box.

3.9 WIRING COLOR CODE
A. 208Y/120 Volt System
Phase A - Black.

Phase A Switch Leg - Black with “S” tag.

Phase B - Red.

Phase B Switch Leg - Red with “S” tag.

Phase C - Blue.

Phase C - Switch Leg - Blue with “S” tag.

Travelers - Yellow.

Neutral - White.

Equipment Ground - Green.

SECTION 26 0000

ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0000 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Provide identification tags on each conductor’s entering panel, switch, junction box and pull box to identify conductor.

3.10 UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES:

A. Set underground pull boxes at +3" above highest adjacent grade level.

B. No splices in Fire Alarm or Signal System conductors are permitted.

C. Size per NEC.

D. Provide nameplate on all covers.

3.11 CONDUCTOR JOINTS AND TAPING:

Make joints in conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG with solderless, tapeless, wing nut type pressure cable connector. Join conductors No. 6 AWG and larger together with approved type or pressure connector and tape to provide insulation not less than that of the conductor. Make connections to switch or bus bar with one-piece copper lugs for conductors No. 8 AWG or larger.

3.12 GROUNDING:

Provide grounding for entire electrical installation as required by the serving utility and codes mentioned in these specifications. Including:

A. Conduit.

B. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.

C. Power and lighting panelboards.

D. Non-current carrying metal parts or fixed equipment.

E. Electrical panels in separate buildings.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The work required under this division is not limited to the electrical specifications and drawings. Refer to all bid documents including Civil, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical documents which may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete and operable electrical system, which shall include all documents that are a part of the entire Project Contract.

1. Work included: Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, skilled supervision necessary for, and incidental to, performing operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of the work in this division complete as shown or noted on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Refer to all sections in the general contract conditions, Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements.

C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others:

1. The electrical work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished by others unless otherwise noted or detailed.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Guarantee See General Conditions:

1. Except as may be specified under other Sections in the specification, guarantee equipment furnished under the
specifications for a period of one year, except for equipment required to have a longer guarantee period, from date of final completion. Guarantee all work against defective workmanship, material, and improper installation. Upon notification of failure, correct deficiency immediately and without additional cost to the Owner.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Standard warranty of manufacturer shall apply for replacement of parts after expiration of the above period. Manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts to the Owner or his service agency as approved. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, printed manufacturer's warranties complete with material included and expiration dates, upon completion of project. Conform to Division

01. B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new, shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety.

C. Codes and Regulations:

1. Design, manufacturer, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following:
a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE b. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL
d. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
e. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
f. American National Standards Institute - ANSI
g. California Electrical Code - CEC, Title 24, Part 3
h. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5 i. California Building Code-CBC, Title 24 Parts 1 &2
j. State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area
k. Occupational Safety & Health Administration - OSHA
l. California State Fire Marshal
SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
m. California Fire Code- CFC, Title 24 Part 9
n. National Electrical Testing Association - NETA

2. The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances, and codes, listed above.

In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply.

D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Codes, Permits, and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence.

Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply. The most stringent condition shall be as interpreted by the Engineer. a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees, and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections, and
arrangements required for the Contractor at his expense shall obtain the Work, unless otherwise specified.
b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. See Division 01 for additional requirements.

2. Time Schedules for Submission and Ordering: The Contractor shall prepare, review, and coordinate his schedule of submissions carefully, determining the necessary lead time for preparing, submitting, checking, ordering and delivery of materials and equipment for timely arrival. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the overall construction schedule.

3. Submittals will be checked for general compliance with specifications only. The Contractor shall be responsible for deviations from the drawings or specifications and for errors or omissions of any sort in submittals.

4. Submit a complete list of materials and equipment proposed for the job, including manufacturers names and catalog numbers.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Shop drawings shall be submitted in completed groups of materials (i.e., lighting fixtures or switchgear). The Contractor shall add and sign the following paragraph on equipment and materials submitted for review. "It is hereby certified that the (equipment) (material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into the project; is in compliance with the Contract Drawings and specifications and can be installed in the allocated spaces". Failure to add the above written statement for compliance will result in return of submittals without review.
a. Bind catalog cuts, plate numbers, descriptive bulletins, and drawings, 11" x 17" (275 mm x 435 mm) or smaller, in sets with covers neatly showing titles.
b. The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to Code compliance for fit prior to submitting shop drawings for approval.
c. Where current limiting devices are specified, submit technical data to substantiate adequate protection of
equipment cascaded downstream. Submittals shall not be
reviewed unless supporting calculations and data are
submitted therewith.
d. Include complete catalog information such as construction, ratings, insulation systems, as applicable.
e. For any material specified to meet UL or trade standards, furnish the manufacturers or vendor's certification that the material furnished for the work does in fact equal or exceed such specifications.
f. Reference listings to the specifications' Sections and Article to which each is applicable.
g. Equipment Floor Plans: After approval of material is secured prepare a floor plan of each electrical and communication equipment space, room, or yard, drawn to scale at 1/2 inch equals 1 foot and submit for approval in the same manner as for shop drawings. The layout drawings shall be exact scale.

6. Contractor shall prepare coordinated drawings when required by Division 01 or where noted otherwise.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Interpretations: The Contractor through the Architect must make Requests for interpretations of drawings and specifications. Any such requests made by equipment manufacturers or suppliers will be referred to the Contractor.

G. Standard of Quality

1. The contract Drawings and Specifications establish the “MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY” each product and/or system must meet to be considered acceptable. Products of other manufactures will be considered if the product and/or system meet or exceed the “MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY” established by this Contract Document.

2. Items for similar application shall be of the same manufacturer.

3. The label of listing by UL shall appear on all materials and equipment for which standards have been established by the agency.

4. Where codes as listed in Section General Requirement Section of the Specifications that establish label or approved requirements, furnish all materials and equipment with either the required labels affixed or the necessary written approval.

5. Provide the type and quantity of electrical materials and equipment necessary to complete Work and all systems in operation, tested and ready for use.

6. Provide and install all incidental items that belong to the Work described and which are required for complete systems.

7. All switchboards, distribution boards, panel boards and circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer.

8. All wiring devices such as switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.

H. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01
I. Submit comprehensive material list, shop drawings and complete technical data for the following equipment and materials:

1. General Requirements:

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Main service and distribution switchboards.
b. Panelboards.
c. Conduits
d. Conductors, include all selected insulation types.
e. Fuses
f. Disconnect switches and Starters.
g. Pullboxes, manholes and handholes.
h. Standard lighting fixtures, specially fabricated fixtures, ballasts, and lamps, with samples and sample of standard finish available (where requested).
i. Control devices, standard and special receptacles, switches, outlets, and finish device plates.
j. Cabinets for signal and telephone system, special terminals, and cabinets. Include all cabinet dimensions.
k. Fire alarm system.
l. Transformers
J. Utility Service:

1. Contractor shall verify the locations shown on the drawings and shall include extensions of lines to building service from locations which are acceptable to the Owner.

2. Verify electrical, civil, architectural, and structural, dimensional, and other requirements with the Owner.

3. Should any major modifications to the work indicated be necessary to comply with the Owner requirements, notify the Architect.

4. Contractor shall contact the utility company representatives to establish pre-construction coordination, obtain all necessary meters and/or approvals, and schedule utility work to coordinate with the construction schedule.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. All utility services shall be installed per the utility company requirements. Verify final construction requirements with utility company service planners prior to construction.

K. Record Drawings: Refer to Division 01, Contract Closeout.

L. Work Responsibilities:

1. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of conduit runs, outlets, junction boxes and equipment and are to be followed. Execute the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of his work. Where conflicts occur in plans and/or specifications, the most stringent application shall apply and shall be part of the base bid.

2. Locations shown on architectural plan or on wall elevations shall take precedence over electrical plan locations, but where a major conflict is evident, notify the Architect.

3. In the event minor changes in the indicated locations or arrangement are necessary due to developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment or due to interference with other trades, such changes shall be made without extra cost.

4. Verify dimensions and the correct location of Owner-Furnished equipment before proceeding with the roughing-in of connections.

5. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work carefully check and verify dimensions and sizes with the drawings to see that the furnished equipment will fit into the spaces provided without violation of applicable Codes.

6. Should any changes to the work indicated on the drawings or described in the specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the Architect.

7. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of coordinated drawings when required by the Architect.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

8. Replace or repair, without additional compensation, any work which does not comply with, or which is installed in violation of any of these requirements.

M. Installation General: For special requirements, refer to specific equipment under these requirements.

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specifications, do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work.

2. Locations of Openings: Locate chases, shafts and openings required for the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure. Do any additional cutting and patching required.

Cutting or drilling in any structural member is prohibited without approval of the Architect. Furnish all access panels to make all boxes, connections, and devices accessible as required by CEC.

3. Location of Sleeves: Where conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs, or metal deck floors, install sleeves of adequate size to permit installation of conduit. Sleeves shall be installed prior to pouring of concrete and shall have ends flush with the wall or extend 2 inches above floor surfaces. Verify locations.

4. Wherever conduit extends through roof, install flashings in accordance with drawings and details.

5. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching which may be required for the proper installation of the electrical work.

6. Protect work, materials and equipment and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Storage outdoors shall be weather protected and shall include space heaters to prevent condensation. Provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials, and equipment before requesting final acceptance.

7. Conduit and Equipment to be Installed: Clean thoroughly to remove plaster, spattered paint, cement, and dirt on both exterior and interior. All underground conduits shall be mandrelled prior to pulling wire.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

8. Conduit and Equipment to be Painted: Clean conduit exposed to view in completed structure by removing plaster and dirt. Remove grease, oil and similar material from conduit and equipment by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents in preparation for paint.

9. Items with Factory Finish: Remove cement, plaster, grease, and oil, and leave surfaces, including cracks and corners, clean and polished. Touch up scratched or bare spots to match finish.

10. Site Cleaning: Remove from site all packing cartons, scrap materials and other rubbish on a weekly basis. Vacuum out all cabinets, switchgear and panels and junction boxes prior to pulling any conductors.

11. Electrical equipment and materials exposed to public and in finished areas shall be finish-painted after installation in accordance with the Painting Section. All exposed screw-type fasteners, exterior, or interior in restrooms, shall be vandal-resistant spanner type; include tool.

N. Excavation, Cutting and Patching:

1. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling required for the work of this Division in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division

2. Excavating and backfilling connected with electrical work, repaving cuts, providing, and maintaining protective measures for the electrical work excavation required by the governing authorities having jurisdiction shall be performed as a part of the work of this Division.

2. Verify openings indicated on the drawings. Provide all cutting, patching and reinforcement of the construction of the building as required to install electrical work.

O. Tests

1. Equipment and systems for which the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) has an approved or recommended procedure, shall be tested in accordance with that procedure. Test values shall equal values recommended by NETA. Copies of test reports shall be submitted as required under shop drawing submittals.

2. Resistance to ground tests shall be accomplished by a qualified independent testing firm to measure resistance to ground at SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
grounding electrodes. Make tests before slabs or affected areas are poured in order that corrective measures, if required, may be taken.

Submit a report showing the results of these measurements. If the resistances exceed values specified elsewhere or NETA test procedure recommendations, perform corrective measures required to reduce resistance to acceptable values.

3. Prior to energizing any motor, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean.

4. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions and submit to the engineer a report showing the results of these measurements.

5. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test. Conduct the test in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner's Representative.

Demonstrate system and equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from electrical and mechanical defects. Provide systems free from short circuits and grounds and show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than the requirements of the governing electric code. Test circuits for proper neutral connection.

6. Complete tests prior to final inspection of project, including corrective work based on the results of the tests.

7. Perform special tests on systems and equipment as specified herein using personnel qualified to perform such tests.

P. Protection: Protect finish parts of the materials and equipment against damage during the progress of the work and until final completion and acceptance. Cover materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred. Keep moving parts clean, dry, and lubricated.

Q. Cleaning Up:

1. Upon completion of the work and at various time during the progress of the work, remove from the building all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Division.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Thoroughly clean switchgear including busses, apparatus, exposed conduit, metal work including the exterior and interior, and accessories for the work of this Division, of cement, plaster, and other deleterious materials; remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent; carefully wipe surfaces and scrape cracks and corners clean.

3. Thoroughly polish chromium or plated work. Remove dirt and stains from lighting fixtures.

4. Leave the entire installation in a clean condition.

R. Completion:

1. The work will not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer's literature, panel directories and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted or installed and final cleaning of equipment and premises has been completed.

2. When the installation is complete and adjustments have been made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time demonstrate that systems are completed and operating in conformance with the specifications.

S. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit complete and at one time, prior to acceptance of the installation, 4 copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists. As specified in Division 01
T. Inspection and Acceptance Procedures: The Architect will submit observation reports periodically during the construction phase detailing Contract deficiencies. The Contractor is responsible for making corrections immediately. Notice of Completion of the project will not be made until all items have been corrected.

U. Final Completion of Electrical Systems:

1. Prior to Final Completion of operating electrical systems, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide materials of the type and quality specified and as necessary for proper operation, tested and ready for use.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
b. Furnish the required Operating and Maintenance
Data/Manuals.
c. Clean up of the project pertaining to this Division of the work. d. After installation has been completed and adjustments made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time, demonstrate to the Architect that systems are complete and operating in conformance with Contract
Documents.
e. Conduct tests required and as specified in this Division and submit test reports and corrective actions taken.
f. Submission of warranties and guarantees.

2. Final Completion of Work Shall be Contingent On:
a. Contractor replacing defective materials and workmanship. b. Upon completion of work and adjustments made, Contractor shall conduct an operating test for each system for approval at such time as Architect directs. Conduct test in presence of authorized representative of Architect and demonstrate that systems and equipment do operate in accordance with
requirements of the Contract Documents and are free from electrical and mechanical defects.
c. Contractor shall provide the necessary training programs and instructions to the Owner's representative. Number of hours shall be a minimum of four (4) hours for each system or days as required under separate Sections of these
Specifications. Complete operation and maintenance
manuals shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to training.
d. Submit copies of manufacturer's instructions and
maintenance of electrical equipment including replacement parts lists. Each set shall include one set of shop drawings of equipment installed.

V. Submittals for Change Orders: When changes are made during the construction phase, deletions and additions shall be presented in a manner that will indicate the cost of each item of material and SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
corresponding labor. Markup shall then be added in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions.

W. The Contractor at a time convenient to the Owner shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The instructors shall have received factory training and shall be thoroughly familiar with the equipment installed. The operating personnel shall receive the number of days’ instruction as indicated in other sections.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record Drawings: CAD: Use a computer aided drafting (CAD) system in the preparation of record drawings for this Project. Acceptable CAD systems shall be capable of producing files in AutoCAD Version 2012 compatible DWG or DXF format. Owner's consultant will furnish CAD backgrounds for use by the Contractor after construction is 85% complete except where prohibited by Contract.

B. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set of Drawings as a Field Record Set. Also maintain at least one copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved submittals, correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data in good order and readily available to Architect and Owner.

C. Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show changes made during the construction process at the time the changed work is installed. No such changes shall be made in the work unless authorized by the Architect.

D. Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 01 requirements.

E. Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the work indicated on the Field Record Set to the record set.

Changes shall be neatly and clearly drawn and noted by skilled draftsmen and shown technically correct.

F. Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, submit the Final Record Drawings to the Architect for review, and make such revisions as may be necessary for Final Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of the work.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS
G. Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit instruction, operation, and maintenance manuals as required and to the extent required under other Sections.

H. At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies, a complete separate, clean, undamaged set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals. As work progresses, maintain records of "as installed" conditions on this set in suitable ink or chemical fluid. Update the set daily. After successful completion of Project Site testing specified herein, and after completion of Punch List corrections, copy all records of "as installed" conditions on to originals.

I. Quantity:

1. Review sets: As for Shop and Field Drawings.

2. Record set: Refer to Division 01.

J. Content: All drawings required under "Field and Shop Drawings". Show "as installed" condition. Where room designations according to Project permanent signage differ from construction designations in the Contract Documents, show both designations.

K. Warranty Certificates: Comply with Division 01.

PART 2 - COMMISSIONING

3.1 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the contract price.

B. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.

C. Prepare preliminary schedule for indoor lighting system inspections, O&M manual submission, training sessions, lighting controls testing, system verification, performance testing, and system completion for use by the CxA. Update schedule as appropriate throughout the construction period and provide updated schedule to the commissioning team.

D. Verify proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 15

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Complete Title 24 Certificate(s) of Installation and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup of HVAC and electrical equipment.

1. Retain Certificate(s) of Installation in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site

2. Make Certificate(s) of Installation available for CxA review upon request.

3. Retain calibration records for equipment provided with manufacturer calibrated sensors in the Certificate(s) of Installation binder.

F. Where applicable, complete the Certificate(s) of Acceptance per the contract documents.

1. Retain Certificate(s) of Acceptance in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site

2. Provide copies of all Certificate(s) of Acceptance to the CxA.

3. Certificate(s) of Acceptance shall be conducted by companies who are certified as California Advanced Lighting Controls Training Program Acceptance Technician (CALCTP-AT) employer and only completed by those employees of said company who are certified to complete the respective acceptance test.

G. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent.

H. Participate in the Certificate(s) of Acceptance and Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent.

I. Participate in the opposite-season testing as required to achieve design intent.

J. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications.

K. Ensure participation of major equipment manufacturers and their representatives as applicable.

L. Obtain O&M data on all equipment and assemble in binders using tabs as required.

M. Conduct a maintenance orientation and inspection with hands on training per the contract documents.

SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 26 0010 - 16

BLDG RENOVATIONS
N. Provide written certification and completed Certificate(s) of Installation forms and checklists documenting that the following work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications and that they are functioning as designed.

1. Correct labeling of all circuits with connected equipment.

2. Lighting system controls operations, including occupancy sensors, automatic time controls or Energy Management control, override timers, manual dimming controls, exterior lighting controls, multi- level switching, as applicable to the Work.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division

26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 01.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3. Section 09 9100 - Painting and Coating.

C. Applicable Standards

1. ASTM D 709 (2007) – Laminated Thermosetting materials.

2. ANSI/NEMA FB-1 (2010) – Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable.

3. ANSI/NEMA 250 (2008) – Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

4. California Electrical Code (CEC).

5. IEEE C57.12.28 (2005) – Standard for Pad-Mounted equipment (Enclosure Integrity).

6. UL 1 (2005) – Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.

7. UL 1242 (2007) – Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.

8. UL 506 (2008) – Specialty Transformers.

9. UL 6 (2010) – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel.

10. UL 797 (2007) – Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel.

11. UL 870 (2008) – Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

1.2 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Quality Assurance:

1. Workers possessing the skills and experience obtained in performing work of similar scope and complexity shall perform the Work of this Division.

2. Refer to other sections of the Specifications for other qualification requirements.

SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Drawings and Specifications Coordination:

1. For purposes of clearness and legibility, Drawings are diagrammatic, and the size and location of equipment is indicated to scale whenever possible. Verify conditions, dimensions, indicated equipment sizes, and manufacturer’s data and
information as necessary to install the Work of this Division.

Coordinate location and layout with other Work.

2. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the equipment to be connected.

3. Drawings indicate required size and points of termination of conduits, number and size of conductors, and diagrammatic routing of conduit. Install conduits with minimum number of bends to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and comply with applicable code requirements.

4. Routing of conduits may be changed provided that the length of any conduit run is not increased more than 10 percent of length indicated on the Drawings.

5. Outlet locations shall be coordinated with architectural elements prior to start of construction. Locations indicated on the Drawings may be distorted for clarity.

6. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with building components and the Work of other trades

7. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of
disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.

8. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with existing underground utilities and services.

C. Terminology:

1. Signal Systems: Applies to clock, bell, fire alarm, annunciator, sound, public address, buzzer, telephone, television, inter- communication, elevator access controls, lighting control systems and security systems.

2. Low Voltage: Applies to signal systems operating at 120 volts and less, and power systems operating at less than 600 volts.

Medium voltage: Applies to power systems operating at more than 600 volts.

3. UL: Underwriter's Laboratories Inc, Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), or equal.

SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Regulations: Work shall comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the California Electrical and Building Codes.

Material shall conform to regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters for electrical wiring and apparatus. Materials shall be new and listed by UL, or another NRTL.

E. Structural Considerations for Conduit Routing:

1. Where conduits pass through or interfere with any structural member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, or where special openings are required through walls, floors, footings, or other buildings elements, conform to CBC, Part 2, Title 24, Section 1906.3 for conduits and pipes embedded in concrete and Sections 2308.9.10 and 2308.9.11 for notches and bored holes in wood; for steel, as detailed on the structural steel Shop Drawings.

2. Where a concrete encasement for underground conduit abuts a foundation wall or underground structure which the conduits enter, encasement shall rest on a haunch integral with wall or structure, or shall extend down to footing projection, if any, or shall be doweled into structure unless otherwise indicated.

Underground structures shall include maintenance holes; pull boxes, vaults, and buildings.

F. Electrically Operated Equipment and Appliances:

1. Furnished Equipment and Appliances:
a. Work shall include furnishing and installing wiring
enclosures for, and the complete connection of electrically operated equipment and appliances and electrical control devices which are specified to be furnished and installed in this or other sections of the Specifications, wiring enclosures shall be concealed except where exposed
Work is indicated on the Drawings.
b. Connections shall be provided as necessary to install equipment ready for use. Equipment shall be tested for
proper operation and, if motorized, for proper rotation. If outlets are of incorrect electrical characteristics or any specified equipment fails to operate properly, repair and/or replace the outlet and/or equipment.

2. Equipment and Appliances Furnished by Others:
a. Equipment and appliances indicated on Drawings as "not in contract" (NIC), "furnished by others,” or "furnished by the Owner,” will be delivered to the Project site. Required electrical connections shall be performed for such
equipment and appliances. Motorized equipment will be
furnished factory-wired to a control panel or junction box SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
unless otherwise indicated. Appliances will be furnished and equipped with portable cord and cap. Provide
disconnect switches where required.
b. Connections to equipment furnished under this Division shall be part of the Work of this section. Work shall include internal wiring, installation, connection, and adjustment of bolted drive motors in which the motor is supplied as a separate unit, and connections only for equipment
furnished with factory installed internal wiring, except as further limited by Drawings and this Specification. Work shall include furnishing and installing suitable outlets, disconnecting devices, starters, push-button stations,
selector switches, conduit, junction boxes, and wiring
necessary for a complete electrical installation. Work shall also include furnishing and installing conduit and boxes for HVAC control systems, furnished under Division 23.

Devices and equipment furnished shall be of same type
used elsewhere on the Work or as specified.
c. Electrical equipment furnished under other sections, for installation and connection under Work of this section, will be delivered to the Project site ready for installation. d. Mechanical equipment furnished under other sections, and requiring electrical connection under this section, will be set in place as part of the Work of the section
furnishing such equipment unless noted otherwise.
e. Suitability and condition of equipment furnished under other sections shall be determined in advance of
installation. Immediate notice of damage, unsuitability, or lack of parts shall be given to the entity providing such equipment.

G. Protection of Materials:

1. Protect materials and equipment from damage and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during progress of the Work. Damaged materials and/or equipment shall be replaced.

H. Cleaning:

1. Exposed parts of Work shall be left in a neat, clean, usable condition. Finished painted surfaces shall be unblemished and metal surfaces shall be polished.

SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Thoroughly clean parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other materials. Remove grease and oil spots with solvent. Such surfaces shall be wiped, and corners and cracks scraped out. Exposed rough metal shall be smooth, free of sharp edges, carefully steel brushed to remove rust and other spots, and left in proper condition to receive finish painting.

3. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

I. WARRANTIES

1. Provide one-year warranty on all material and labor performed, unless noted otherwise in specific sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Advise the representative of the Owner before starting the Work of this Division.

B. Exposed conduits shall be painted to match the surfaces adjacent to installation.

C. Salvaged materials removed from buildings shall be removed from the Project site as required by the Owner.

D. Electrical equipment shall be braced and anchored for CBC Seismic Design requirements, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3.2 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site with proper identification, which shall include names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for City identification; all products and materials shall be adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and patching of electrical equipment, components, and materials shall include the removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MILLS PARK 26 0500 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.

C. Repair or restore other work, or surfaces damaged as a result of the work performed under this contract.

3.4 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose off the Project site.

B. Remove equipment and implements of service, and leave entire work area neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Owner Authorized Representative.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0513

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
MILLS PARK 26 0513 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Basic electrical methods.

2. Grounding.

3. Hangers and support.

4. Electrical identification.

5. Electrical system testing and inspection.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 0110 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.2 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS
A. Drawings are schematic and diagrammatic. Use judgment and care to install electrical Work to function properly and fit within building construction and finishes. Electrical conductors, conduit, components, not shown or specified, which are required for any device or system to produce a complete and operative system are required to be furnished and installed.

B. Exact locations of fixtures are determined from dimension on Drawings, manufacturer's shop drawings, or as may be determined at Project Site. Do not scale Drawings for exact location of any item. Verify item mounting heights as required by project conditions prior to rough-in.

C. Surface mounted raceways or conduit permitted only at locations directed by representatives of the Owner.

D. Circuit grouping, conduit or cable runs and home runs with number of conductors required by code in each raceway to clarify operation and function of various systems. Provide proper number of conductors and conduits or cables to provide operative system as indicated on Contract Documents. Do not regroup any feeder circuits, branch circuits, home runs, and zone alarms at any point, from that shown on Contract Documents.

E. Do not connect two ungrounded conductors to same circuit breaker/fused switch in any panel. Circuit runs consist of a maximum of five conductors; 3 phase conductors, 1 neutral conductor, and 1 equipment ground conductor, unless otherwise noted. Do not splice branch circuit conductors in any panels, safety switches, or non-automatic circuit breakers in separate enclosures.

SECTION 26 0513

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
MILLS PARK 26 0513 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Seal and make permanent watertight penetrations by electrical raceways or equipment through ceilings, walls, or floors.

1. Seal penetrations in non-fire rated ceilings, walls or floors material specified in Section 07 9200 - Sealants.

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A, and NFPA 70.

H. Install equipment and materials to provide required maintenance and code working clearance for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow required space for removal of parts that require replacement or servicing.

I. Remove existing equipment, lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles as required to facilitate new installation. Remove existing wiring and conduit serving items to be removed. Conduit in inaccessible areas shall be cut off below finished surfaces and existing surface patched to match existing. Provide blank plates on existing flush mounted outlet boxes that will be abandoned.

Remove all abandoned conductors from raceways.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING
A. Wire:

1. Material: Stranded copper.

2. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Product Requirements: Furnish and install approved materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, and supports to carry loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit plus 300 pounds.

B. Materials and Finishes: Corrosion resistive.

SECTION 26 0513

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
MILLS PARK 26 0513 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Steel Structural Elements: Beam clamps and welded fasteners.

2. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.

3. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.

4. Solid Masonry Walls: Expansion anchors.

5. Sheet Metal: Sheet metal screws.

6. Wood: Wood screws.

2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Wire and Cable Markers:

1. Description: Cloth tape or tubing type wire markers.

2. Locations: Each conductor at panel board gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.

3. Legend:
a. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GROUNDING
A. Provide grounding in conformance with NFPA 70.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

C. Testing and Inspection:

1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

3.2 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Furnish and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA SI.

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.

D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

SECTION 26 0513

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
MILLS PARK 26 0513 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

F. Obtain permission from City Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION: Installation of materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, instructions, industry standards, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Provide all mounting facilities for securing or hanging fixtures, equipment, and outlets to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Details shown on the plans are for the purpose of establishing the extent and general methods required. Provide all sleeves, inserts, expansion joints, vibration fitting, etc. Provide storage facilities and protect all work, materials and equipment from damage during process of work.

Materials and equipment shall not be stored exposed to weather. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials, and equipment without additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 CONDUIT AND WIRING: All conduit and wiring shall be installed concealed in walls, above ceilings and below floor slabs or exposed in accordance with applicable regulations and the Electrical Drawings. All penetrations of fire-rated walls or ceilings to be coordinated with Owner. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically. Exact routing and location of the equipment to be determined in the field.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - ELECTRICAL TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Section 014000 - Quality Control: Field testing and inspection.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Safety Practices: Include, but not limited to, the following requirements:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 - OSHA.
b. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, Seventh Edition, National Safety Council, Chapter 4.
c. Applicable State and Local Safety Operating Procedures. d. NETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program.
e. NFPA 70E - Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplace.
f. American National Standards for Personnel Protection, ANSI Z244.1.

2. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required herein.

3. Power Circuits: Conductors shorted to ground by a hot line grounded device approved for the purpose.

C. Tests and inspections include, but are not limited to the following:

SECTION 26 0513

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
MILLS PARK 26 0513 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Proper operation of lights and equipment.

2. Continuity of raceway system.

3. Insulation leakage and impedances.

4. Sub-system tests indicated in other Sections.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Wiring connectors.

C. Electrical tape.

D. Heat shrink tubing.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.

F. Cable ties.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification of products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013 (Reapproved 2018).

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2023.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2020).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.

F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2020.

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2021.

I. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 267 - Outline of Investigation for Wire-Pulling Compounds; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years’ documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.

F. Armored cable is not permitted.

G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.

D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

H. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

I. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG,
for voltage drop.
4) 20A exterior circuits: 10 AWG..

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

J. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black
insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:
a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.
c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
d. Rome Wire and Cable.
e. Okonite Wire
f. Pirelli Wire and Cable
g. Carol Cable
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.
a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.
b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.

2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.

C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required.

D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation.

E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.

F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

C. Wire Pulling Lubricant:

1. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 267.

2. Suitable for use with conductors/cables and associated insulation/jackets to be installed.

3. Suitable for use at installation temperature.

D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated.

5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote- control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted.

Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.

G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

H. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking, or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturers’ recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using
manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing
electrical tape.

3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

N. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

O. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.

P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section Firestopping.

Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MILLS PARK 26 0519 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

D. Ground bars.

E. Ground rod electrodes.

F. Ground access wells.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 6519 – Luxury Vinyl Composite Tile: Static control flooring.

B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification of products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2022.

D. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete- encased electrode.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components.

B. Field quality control test reports.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years’ documented experience.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not normally constitute dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

F. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode
conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.
b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous.
c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:
a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded
within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

5. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide two electrodes unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode.
c. Provide ground access well for each electrode.

6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance.

7. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70. Connect SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as possible to service disconnect enclosure.
c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect.

H. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:

1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.

2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.

3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.

4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground.

I. Separately Derived System Grounding:

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:
a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system, where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Where common grounding electrode conductor ground riser is used for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems, provide bonding jumper to connect the metal building frame and metal water piping in the area served by the derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor.

5. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located outside the building or structure supplied, provide connection to grounding electrode at source in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

7. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

J. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non- current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping.
c. Metal process piping.

8. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.

9. Provide bonding for metal building frame.

10. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame.

K. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:

1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA 70.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination.
a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise
indicated or required.
c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed
underground in direct contact with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased
in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Ground Bars:

1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.

2. Size: As indicated.

3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.

E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Ground Access Wells:

1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.

2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches.

4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking, or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturers’ recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using
manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions.

Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not normally constitute dry conditions.

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0526 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2023.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate work to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

4. Coordinate arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment, and other potential conflicts.

5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has cured; see Section 03 3000.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel/strut framing systems, nonpenetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete/masonry anchors.

B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with the following. Where requirements differ, comply with most stringent.
a. NFPA 70.
b. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for complete installation of electrical work.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended, where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion-resistant materials suitable for environment where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use
galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps and clamps suitable for conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers and brackets suitable for boxes to be supported.

D. Metal Channel/Strut Framing Systems:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated, continuous-slot, metal channel/strut and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field assembly of supports.

2. Comply with MFMA-4.

3. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use
galvanized steel.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded, zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

F. Anchors and Fasteners:

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use anchor and fastener types indicated for specified applications.

2. New Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts.

3. Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.

4. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors.

5. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

6. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

7. Steel: Use welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19 21 23 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

8. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

9. Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

10. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

11. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel/strut and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.
a. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel/strut framing system.
b. Comply with MFMA-4.
c. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for
compliance with applicable building code.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install hangers and supports in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal, fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel/strut to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel/strut secured to studs to support equipment surface mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel/strut to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0529 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. Secure fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

K. Remove temporary supports.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete or Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)" as applicable.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturers’ written instructions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

D. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

E. Galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2020.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S); 2020.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2020.

E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Metal Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2018.

G. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES) - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series; 2015.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
K. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with actual type and quantity of conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, and other potential conflicts.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment.

4. Coordinate work to provide roof penetrations that preserve integrity of roofing system and do not void roof warranty.

5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit between termination points is complete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Organization recognized by OSHA as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70, manufacturer's instructions, and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use conduit types indicated for specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with most restrictive requirements.

Where conduit type for particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or schedule 80 rigid PVC conduit where emerging from underground.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

5. Where galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) or galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has resistivity of less than 2000 ohm- centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape, factory- applied corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. Where galvanized rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection for minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges.

D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

J. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

K. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

L. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC- coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

M. Hazardous/Classified Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

N. Flexible Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC).

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

O. Flexible Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC).

2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.

4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.

P. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or stainless steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

2.2 CONDUIT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Provide conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for complete raceway system.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended.

D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4-inch trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 1/2-inch trade size.

4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8-inch trade size.

5. Underground, Exterior: 1-inch trade size.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B or UL 6.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only.

Threadless fittings, including set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

2.6 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil,

0.040 inch.

C. PVC-Coated Boxes and Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use boxes and fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514A, UL 514B, or UL 6.

3. Hazardous/Classified Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for classification of installed location.

4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

5. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil, 0.015 inch.

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard-wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1 and listed for use in classified firestop systems.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.8 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.9 GALVANIZED STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

2.10 STAINLESS STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.11 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT (RTRC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying with NEMA TC 14 (SERIES).

B. Supports: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected.

2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil,

0.020 inch.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive compound listed as complying with UL 2419; suitable for use with conduit to be installed.

C. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon or polyester tape with average breaking strength of not less than 1,250 lbf.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install conduit in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Galvanized Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Install in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Install in accordance with NECA 101.

E. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Install using only tools approved by manufacturer.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated.

Route other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

5. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than equivalent of four 90- degree bends between pull points.

7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

11. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.

12. Group parallel conduits in same area on common rack.

G. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by authorities having jurisdiction; see Section 26 0529.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

8. Use nonpenetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops, where approved.

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

H. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquid tight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Provide insulating bushings, insulated throats, or listed metal fittings with smooth, rounded edges at conduit terminations to protect conductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

I. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

6. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.

7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements; see Section 07 8413.

J. Underground Installation:

1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 18 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length.

K. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section Concrete with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

L. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

M. Conduit Sealing:

1. Use foam conduit sealant to prevent entry of moisture and gases.

This includes, but is not limited to:

2. Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, use foam conduit sealant at accessible point near penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
b. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

N. Provide pull string in each empty conduit and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

O. Provide grounding and bonding; see Section 26 0526.

SECTION 26 0533.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.13 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
P. Identify conduits; see Section 26 0553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

D. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

E. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA

70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated.

8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for floor boxes and underground boxes/enclosures.

B. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.1 BOXES
A. General Requirements:

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and
equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required.

6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.

SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.

11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems
Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.
b. Communications Systems Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch (100 by 54 mm) trade size.
c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.

13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.

SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.

G. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section Access Panels as required were approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back- to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.

9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of
openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square
feet of wall area.

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 260533.13.

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

H. Box Supports:

SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

I. Install boxes plumb and level.

J. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

N. Close unused box openings.

O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign material.

SECTION 260533.16

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0533.16 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Underground warning tape.

F. Warning signs and labels.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

B. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2023.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2023.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2024.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not conceal items to be identified in locations such as suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed.

2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating and name.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include
location when not within sight of equipment.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main
overcurrent protective device.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces.
b. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating and name.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include
location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares
and spaces using pencil.
5) For power panelboards without a door, use
identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces.
c. Transformers:
1) Identify kVA rating and name.

2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.

3. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.
b. Industrial control panels.
c. Motor control centers.
d. Elevator control panels.
e. Industrial machinery.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "Arc Flash and Shock
Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection
equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or
approved equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 260519.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors.

C. Identification for Raceways:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight.

3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.

4. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.

D. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.

2. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed.
a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels.

E. Identification for Devices:

1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 262726.

2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate.

3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall- mounted control devices installed at one location.

F. Identification for Luminaires:

1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification Nameplates:

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.

2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.
a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches.

3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:
a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
b. Other Information: 1/4 inch.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

D. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.

5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

E. Format for Receptacle Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

F. Format for Control Device Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Load controlled, or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self- adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.

B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

C. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.

2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

D. Legend:

1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection.

C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

D. Color:

2.6 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:

2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
MILLS PARK 26 0553 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.

8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.

9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0583

WIRING CONNECTIONS
MILLS PARK 26 0583 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:

1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.

2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 26 0583

WIRING CONNECTIONS
MILLS PARK 26 0583 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1.

2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

SECTION 26 0583

WIRING CONNECTIONS
MILLS PARK 26 0583 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 260802

INSTALLATION & ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MILLS PARK 26 0802 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 TITLE 24 REQUIRES THE COMPLETION OF ALL APPLICABLE

CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATES OF ACCEPTANCE FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE INDOOR AND OUTDOOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contract drawings and specifications, general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions, electrical provisions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Complete all Title 24 required Certificate(s) of Installation (NRCI) and Certificate(s) of Acceptance (NRCA) to be completed per the contract documents.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLING CONTRACTORS
A. General Contractor (GC)

1. Ensure that all contractors identified as the contractor responsible for acceptance testing and completion of the Title 24 Certificate(s) of Acceptance are certified by the State of California or its designated body to conduct each respective test.

B. Electrical Contractor (EC)

1. Verify proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided.

2. Meet with acceptance tester at beginning of construction to review project requirements.

3. Complete Title 24 Certificate(s) of Installation and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup/programming of lighting control equipment.
a. Retain Certificate(s) of Installation in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site
b. Make Certificate(s) of Installation available for building inspector’s review.

SECTION 260802

INSTALLATION & ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MILLS PARK 26 0802 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Retain calibration records for equipment provided with manufacturer calibrated sensors in the Certificate(s) of Installation binder.
d. Correct labeling of all circuits with connected equipment.

4. Complete the Certificate(s) of Acceptance per the contract documents.
a. The company installing the lighting systems must be an authorized Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer
certified by a Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider or include in their bid the cost of retaining and overseeing a contractor who is an authorized Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer to complete the acceptance testing.
b. All required acceptance testing must be completed by a Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician employed by the Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer. The
acceptance tester shall be present for all commissioning efforts.
c. Retain Certificate(s) of Acceptance in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site
d. Upload all Certificate(s) of Acceptance to the California Title 24 Certificates of Acceptance database, if, at the time of project completion, the database is available to the public.

5. Successful completion of the required Acceptance Tests is the responsibility of the installing contractor. Any costs associated with modifications necessary to obtain compliance and re-testing of systems shall be included in the base bid of this project.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates and covers.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification of products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2014h (Validated 2022).

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification); 2017g (Validated 2023).

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use with ratings adequate for load served.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

2.3 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.

C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.

D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.

E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.

2.4 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc : www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general- use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer
Style: www.lutron.com/#sle.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America,
Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Automatically Controlled Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; controlled receptacle marking on device face per NFPA 70; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFCI Receptacles:

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed- through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section.

1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES
MILLS PARK 26 2726 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
I. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

O. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 5010

SOLID STATE (LED) LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5010 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Interior and exterior luminaires and accessories.

2. Drivers.

3. Luminaire accessories.

B. Substitutions:

1. Or approved equal if permitted in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.

C. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the work of this section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the work of this section may be found in other documents.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 26 0500 – Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

G. As specified in Section 26 0500 – Electrical.

1.3 SUBMMITALS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

B. As specified in Section 26 0500 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

1. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data for each fixture specified.

2. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency.

Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

SECTION 26 5010

SOLID STATE (LED) LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5010 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Section 01 7704 - Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each type of fixture.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Section 01 7704 - Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Extra Products: At completion of installation, deliver to Engineer. Two of each luminaire lens type.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Division 1 requirements.

B. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section shall not deprive the City of other Rights the City may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by this Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Special Warranty for LEDs and Drivers: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer of LED’s and drivers agrees to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. LED arrays: 10 years from date of Beneficial Occupancy.

2. Drivers: 10 years from date of Beneficial Occupancy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LED LUMINAIRES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide LED luminaries, of types and sizes indicated on fixture schedules. Furnish and install LED light fixture with permanently-fixed LED lamp module, complete with dedicated LED drivers and required mounting hardware. Prior to ordering fixtures, verify mounting methods and finishes.

SECTION 26 5010

SOLID STATE (LED) LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5010 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Luminaries to be provided under this scope include the following:

1. Alcon 4’ LED Pendant Mount 12100-40-P, or OWNER approved equal.

2. Alcon 4’ LED Recessed Lay-In Mount 12100-40-R, or OWNER approved equal.

3. Alcon 4’ LED Surface Mount 12100-40-S, or OWNER approved equal.

4. Williams 4’ LED Surface Mount 75R-4-L50/835-QS-DIM-UNV, or OWNER approved equal.

5. Alcon LED Square Trim Recessed Downlight Fixture 14083-16-30K, or OWNER approved equal.

6. Alcon 12”x12” Exterior LED Wall Pack 16009-26W-35K, or OWNER approved equal.

7. Surelites Exit Signage CAR717000R, or OWNER approved equal.

C. Material and specifications for each luminaire are as follows:

1. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply).

2. Each luminaire shall be rated for a minimum operational life of 50,000 hours at an average operating time of 12.0 hours per day. This life rating must be conducted at 40°C ambient temperature.

3. The rated operating temperature range shall be -30°C to +40°C.

4. Each luminaire can operate above 100°F [37°C], but not expected to comply with photometric requirements at elevated temperatures.

5. Photometry must be compliant with IESNA LM-79 and shall be conducted at 25°C ambient temperature.

6. The individual LEDs shall be constructed such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire.

7. Luminaire shall be constructed such that LED modules may be replaced or repaired without replacement of whole luminaire.

8. Each luminaire shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. under UL1598 for luminaires, or an equivalent standard from a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
As specified in Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. Outlet box for ceiling mounted exit signs: Connect to rigid conduit system.

SECTION 26 5010

SOLID STATE (LED) LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5010 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

C. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed by the Engineer.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Conform to Section 017300 - Execution: Cleaning installed work.

B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

F. Replace any fixtures that are defective or flickers, just prior to Final Acceptance.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 5600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5600 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; 2019.

B. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources; 2021.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2023.

D. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000 (Reaffirmed 2006).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

SECTION 26 5600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5600 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

C. Samples:

1. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years’ documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect them from damage until ready for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five-year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 26 5600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5600 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings, and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

G. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

SECTION 26 5600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5600 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

C. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTING
SECTION 26 5600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
MILLS PARK 26 5600 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The General Provisions shall apply to all miscellaneous concrete work operations. Provide labor, materials, tools, transportation, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified.

B. Related Sections:

Section 03 1000: Concrete Formwork
Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Concrete
Section 32 8400: Irrigation
C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “Greenbook,” latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the “Greenbook,” unless otherwise determined by the Engineer.

D. Definitions.

1. City: City of Carson

2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer’s designated representative.

3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.

B. Manufacturer’s directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications.

C. The work included in this section will be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The decision by the Engineer as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final.

D. Material quality standards and testing procedures shall be in accordance with all ASTM standards and testing procedures and shall be the latest requirements.

1. All tests shall be made by a testing laboratory acceptable and approved by the Engineer.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. One mechanical analysis and one decantation test shall be made of the sand and coarse aggregate proposed for the work.

E. Reinforcing Steel: All steel shall be Grade 60 billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615.

F. Reinforcement shall be as indicated in the latest version of the soils report.

The soils report shall take precedence over the construction drawings.

Steel reinforcement indicated in construction details is for reference only.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout plan locating all joints for all concrete slabs. Construction and isolation joints shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest version of the soils report.

B. Samples: At a location acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall Prepare minimum 4-foot square samples of each required slab to demonstrate methods used for construction of natural color concrete with medium broom finish using material, workmanship, and joint treatments to be used throughout the project. The sample shall include a transverse isolation joint, scoring, and edging.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete for flatwork shall be as indicated on the construction material schedule located in the construction documents. Concrete flatwork shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3000 psi, unless indicated otherwise in the Construction Documents.

B. Concrete for Splash Pad to be 6” thick. Concrete pad to have required contraction or doweled isolation joints every 18’ x 18’ and saw cut control joints at 6’. Provide thicken profile at edge of pad and at each structure/embed. Concrete to have waterproofing admix, Xypex or approved equal
C. Concrete for Splash pad dry zone to be 5’ wide apron, 3250 psi around perimeter of splash pad w/ drains. Dry zone concrete to be 5” thick, reinforced with W6 on 4”x”4 spacing or #4 bars spaced at 12” O.C. each way. Apron to include concealed expansion joint at perimeter edge of splash pad and saw-cut joints. Concrete to have waterproofing admix, Xypex or approved equal.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Portland Cement shall be Type V, low alkali, and shall conform to ASTM C150.

E. Waterproofing Admixture shall be Xypex Admixture C-500 cementitious waterproofing or approved equal. Water proofing admixture shall be added at the time of batching.

F. Top-Cast Decorative Finish System, by Dayton Superior or approved equal. Store products per manufacturer instructions.

G. Concrete aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33. All aggregate shall be well graded and selected from a source that has a proven history of non- reactivity. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/4 inch.

H. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed natural sand having hard, strong, and durable particles and which does not contain more than 2% by weight of clay, loam, shale, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances.

I. Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, fine grained, sound crushed rock or gravel, which does not contain more than 5% by weight of flat, chip-like, thin, elongated, friable or laminated pieces. Any piece having a major dimension more than two and one-half (2 1/2) times the average thickness and which will adversely affect the strength of the concrete shall not be used.

J. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.

K. Each component of the concrete flatwork shall be supplied from the same source for the entire project.

2.2 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING
A. The concrete shall be composed of cement, sand and coarse aggregate in the proportions as determined by the testing laboratory. Cost of mix design shall be borne by Contractor.

B. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at time of placing does not exceed the following slumps when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessary for workability required by part of structure being cast.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Part of Structure Maximum
Slump Inches
Maximum Water-
Cement Ratio
Footings, foundation walls, and mass
concrete, not reinforced
4 0.6
Slabs on grade, reinforced and non-
reinforced
3 0.45
Reinforced concrete over 8” thick 4 0.5
Reinforced concrete 8” or less thick 4-1/2 0.5
All other concrete 4 0.5
C. The concrete shall be mixed as follows:

1. Each transit mixer shall be equipped with automatic devices for recording the number of revolutions of the drum prior to completing the mixing, with peripheral drum speed of approximately 200 feet per minute.

2. Transit-mix concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than ten (10) minutes. At least three (3) minutes of the mixing period shall be immediately prior to discharging at the job.

3. Transit-mix concrete shall not be delivered to the work with the total specified amount of water incorporated therein. Two (2) gallons of water per cubic yard shall be withheld, and may be incorporated in the mix, before the concrete is discharged from the mixer truck.

4. The concrete, at time of placing, shall be in such condition that it can be properly placed.

2.3 SAWCUT BLADES
A. Sawcut blade type to be 3/16” wide blade(s) by Ebbert Company (714) 437- 5000 or approved equal.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surface in accordance with the latest version of the geotechnical soils report.

3.2 EDGE FORMS
A. Place form work in accordance with the Concrete Formwork section of the specifications. See related sections.

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars” for placing and supporting reinforcement.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Place reinforcement in accordance with the latest version of the geotechnical soils report.

C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other bond-reducing materials.

D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bars supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.

F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement.

G. Provide necessary chairs or supports and maintain position of reinforcing bars.

H. Reinforcement to be placed and approved by the engineer prior to pouring of concrete.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Before the placing of any concrete, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and wet. Concrete shall be poured into forms immediately after it is mixed, so that no separation will occur. No concrete which has stood for more than fifteen (15) minutes after leaving the mixer shall be used. Concrete shall be rejected if not placed in final position within ninety (90) minutes after water is first added to the batch.

B. Maximum free drop of concrete shall not be more than 5’-0”. Use tremies in deep sections.

C. The location of all stoppages shall be approved by the Engineer.

D. The flow surface of the freshly poured concrete shall be level whenever any pour is stopped, and tight dams shall be built as necessary to accomplish this result. Construction joints shall be made only when unavoidable, and then only at the point determined by the Engineer.

Details of such joints shall be directed by the Engineer.

E. Before the placing of any concrete, the surface of the previously poured concrete shall be clean, wet, and free of oil or any other contamination.

F. Install concrete finish work true to lines, dimensions, levels, and finish with smooth unblemished surfaces for exterior finishes specified on Plans.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
G. Remove and replace defective concrete work with new materials.

Permission to patch any defective area shall not be a waiver of the right of the City to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work.

H. No advertising impression, stamp, or mark of any description will be permitted on the surface of concrete finish.

3.5 CONCRETE FINISH
A. Compact and tamp concrete as specified to bring 3/8” of mortar to surface, wood float to straight edges and screeds, and apply following finishes. Do not use steel or plastic floats of any kind for initial floating operations.

Unless otherwise specified, do not apply finishes until surface water disappears and surface is sufficiently hardened. Remove any bleed water and laitance as it appears.

B. Top-Cast finish contractor to have 10 years’ experience of using top-cast product.

C. Apply top-cast uniformly per manufacturer directions.

3.6 ISOLATION AND CONTROL JOINTS
A. Isolation joint material shall be as noted on the Plans.

B. Locate expansion and control joints to least impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In no case place an intersecting construction joint in such a way that two intersecting walks are separated by a construction or control joint at the point of intersection. Transition curves shall be part of a continuous pour of the intersection slab.

1. Isolation joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20’) apart, with control joints a maximum of ten feet (10’) apart or ten feet (10’) from isolation joints. Exception to this is specialty work joints which will be laid out as shown on the Plans.

2. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of layout showing proposed location of joints before pouring concrete.

C. Caulking of isolation joints were called for on the Plans shall be done with a non-tracking, multi-part flow type, self-leveling, polyurethane sealant manufactured by Chem-Seat, Grace, 3-H or approved equivalent. Apply silica sand, 100% coverage, to joints before joint sealant has cured.

Remove excess sand after joint sealant has fully cured.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Color shall match the color of the concrete where the isolation joint occurs unless shown otherwise on the plans.

2. Caulking shall be done by an experienced applicator in a workmanlike manner, in smooth straight runs, after thoroughly cleaning and priming joints.

3. All work shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Do not permit traffic to travel over seated joints until sealer is fully cured.

D. Sawcut Joints

1. Install sawcut joints as shown on the Drawings using acceptable mechanical concrete saw (no Skill saws) with a new diamond- tipped blade as soon as concrete surface is sufficiently firm not to be torn, damaged by the blade, or cause spalling of the finish.

Install sawcut control joints within 48 hours from time of placement.

2. Cut all sawcut joints to a uniform depth and width as called out on the Drawings. All joints shall be clean, smooth, and straight. Use forms or templates as required to achieve a consistent plumb and straight quality. Joints shall end cleanly at edge of slab and shall not extend into adjacent concrete pours.

3. A small radius blade (hand saw) shall be used to extend depth of cut to bring sawcut joints to within ½ of vertical surfaces and connect to perpendicular sawcut joints. Overlapping of sawcut joints into adjacent concrete panels or bands or wavy joint lines are not acceptable and will be rejected. Mis-jointed panels will be rejected.

4. Forming: Form joints and other edges in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression for saw cutting. Strike all edges before and after brooming.

5. Sawcut: Sawcut with 3/16-inch-wide saw blades to a depth of ⅓ of the concrete thickness for control or construction joints, or as shown on the drawings.

3.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Smoothness tolerance of exterior concrete finish surfaces shall be of such smoothness and evenness that they shall contact the entire length of a 10’ straight edge laid in any direction, with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch.

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING
MILLS PARK 32 1313 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Any operations necessary to achieve this result shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

B. Inspections will be provided, as necessary. Call for inspection two (2) working days prior to need.

C. The Contractor shall call for inspection during specific phases of construction. They shall include:

1. All form work prior to pouring.

2. Subgrade prior to pouring.

D. Contractor shall notify the Engineer twenty-four (24) hours prior to pouring any concrete.

E. Any work covered prior to inspection shall be opened to view by the Contractor at his expense.

3.8 TESTING
A. Compression tests of concrete shall be made as required by the Building Code except that compression tests of any grade of concrete shall be made whenever the quantity of that grade used in the project exceeds 25 cubic yards. At least two identical cylinders of each grade of concrete shall be taken of each 100 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof placed in the work. The cylinders shall be tested in a testing laboratory and test reports submitted to the City.

B. Storage of test cylinders on the site and after delivery to the testing shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation C31.

1. Should the strength by test fail, the mix shall be adjusted so that the resulting concrete shall comply with the minimum requirements, and all additional expense resulting from such adjustment shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. Should the strength of any grade by test fall below minimum, concrete from the defective pours which is in place may be tested by the core method. If such tests show the concrete to be defective, the concrete shall be removed and replaced or adequately strengthened as required under the governing Code. All expenses involved shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. Testing of concrete shall be at the discretion of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements”, shall apply to all work in this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish all materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to install landscape joint sealants as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Related Sections:

Section 03 1000: Concrete Formwork
Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Concrete
Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving
C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “Greenbook,” latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the “Greenbook,” unless otherwise determined by the City.

D. Definitions:

1. City: City of Carson

2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer’s designated representative.

3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials.

E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer’s representatives and the associated addresses, phone, and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City.

1.3 REFERENCES
AAMA 800 - Specifications and Tests Methods for Sealants.

AAMA 850 - Fenestration Sealants Guide Manual.

ASTM C 661 - Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Mean of Durometer.

ASTM C 790 - Use of Latex Sealants.

ASTM C 804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.

ASTM C 834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.

ASTM C 919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.

ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
ASTM C 962 - Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

ASTM C 1085 - Butyl Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealants.

ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

ASTM D 1565 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-- Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).

ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).

Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543 Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base.

Fed. Spec. TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type.

SWI: Sealants - The Professional's Guide.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Division 1.

B. Submit a list of sealants used, data sheets indicating sealant chemical characteristics, manufacturer’s instructions, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. Submit which type of sealant installation system proposed for each condition to fulfill sealing requirements.

C. Samples:

1. Submit two samples of each sealant type and color specified for use on project for review and approval by the Engineer.

2. Match sealant color with adjacent paving color. Provide colors from manufacturer’s standard or extended color palette, however, the Engineer’s will not be limited to manufacturer’s standard or extended color palette.

3. Unavailability of a specified color in conjunction with a manufacturer’s product requires providing a product of another specified manufacturer in which designated color is available.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with a minimum of 5 years’ documented experience.

B. Coordination with Other Trades the installation of sealant and caulking materials of this section with adjacent work of other trades.

C. Obtain manufacturer's local representative supervision for the following:

1. Inspection of Work just prior to start of sealant application.

2. Provide initial instruction at start of Work, to ensure that physical conditions which could result in defective work are properly corrected before materials are applied.

3. Instruct personnel in correct procedures.

4. Verify that proper procedures are being followed.

5. Notify manufacturer at least 72 hours prior to time it is required.

6. Failure or refusal of manufacturer’s local representative to provide inspection and supervision required by this Section constitutes grounds for non-acceptability of materials manufactured by it even though such materials have been specified or approved.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.

B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conform to sealant manufacturers’ recommendations for temperatures (ambient, surface and material), moisture, humidity, and similar factors that affect installation of joint sealant materials.

B. Install joint sealant materials at times when temperatures of surface materials are approximately at median of service temperature extremes.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with sections of work referenced in this Section.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion, cohesion, or do not cure for a period of 5 years from date of Final Acceptance by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANT TYPES
A. Type 1 (vertical joint applications):

1. Two-part, non-sag polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Use NT, M, A, and O for non-traffic, vertical applications not subject to service temperatures in excess of 150°F. or joint movement in excess of ±50%.

2. Acceptable Manufacturer’s:
a. Vulkem 922; Mameco International, Inc.
b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corp.
c. Sikaflex-2C NS; Sika Corporation.
d. Sonolastic NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products.
e. Dymeric 511; Tremco.

B. Type 3 (horizontal joint applications): Two-part, non-sag polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C 920-87, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, M, A.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer’s:
a. Dynatred; Pecora Corp.
b. Vulkem 227; Vulkem Corp.
c. THC-901; Tremco.
d. 2C; Sika Corporation.
e. Sonolastic SL-2; Sonneborn Building Products.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

B. Masking Tape: Provide masking tape on horizontal surfaces prior to installing sealant.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. 3M; Longmask.

C. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

D. Backer Rod:

1. Horizontal Joints: 9 lb. density, non-gassing, closed-cell polyethylene rod. Oversize rod to 25 to 30% of joint width.

2. Vertical Joints: 2 lb. density, non-gassing, closed-cell polyethylene rod. Oversize rod to 25 to 30% of joint width.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Sof-Rod; Sonneborn Building Products.
b. Dual Rod; Nomaco.
c. NMC Sof Rod; ITP.

PART 3; EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive Work.

B. Verify that backer rod and bond breaker tape are compatible with sealant.

3.2 JOINT PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter from joint which might impair adhesion of backer rod and sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not spill primer onto visible concrete. Immediately wipe off primer if spilling occurs.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 BACKER ROD INSTALLATION
A. Allow primer to dry before installing backer rod.

B. Measure joint dimensions and size backer rod to be larger than 25 to 30% of the joint to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer rod.

D. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer rod.

3.4 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Provide masking tape along joint edges prior to installing sealant.

B. Install sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install sealant by proven techniques that result in sealant directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes, and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

D. Install sealants at same time sealant backings are installed.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.

Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tooling:

1. Tool joints concave.

2. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time curing begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads, eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

3. Remove excess sealant from adjacent joint surfaces.

4. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealant or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

SECTION 32 1373

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 32 1373 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect sealants until fully cured.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation, and incidentals to provide and install Concrete Pavers and Bricks as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified.

B. Related Sections.

D. Definitions.

1. City: City of Carson

2. Engineer: District Engineer, or the District Engineer’s designated representative.

3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials
E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer’s representatives and the associated addresses, phone, and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installation similar in design, material, and extent indicated on this project.

2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.

A. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.

B. Mock-Ups:

SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Install a 7 ft x 7 ft paver area to demonstrate 4-piece random pattern.

2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern, color and texture of the job.

3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged.

4. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work.

5. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

2. C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Section 8, Freezing and Thawing.

3. ASTM C 136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

4. ASTM C 140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units.

5. ASTM C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

6. ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

7. ASTM C 979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.

8. ASTM D 698, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

9. ASTM D 1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

10. ASTM D 2940, Specifica
tion for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or
Subbases for Highways or Airports.

B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI):

1. ICPI Tech Spec Technical Bulletins

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Manufacturer’s drawings and details: Indicate perimeter conditions, relationship to adjoining materials and assemblies, concrete paver layout, patterns, color arrangement, installation and setting details.

C. Sieve analysis per ASTM C 136 for grading of bedding and joint sand.

SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Concrete pavers:

1. Four representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color, and finish that indicate the range of color variation and texture expected in the finished installation.

2. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work.

3. Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of concrete pavers with ASTM C 936.

4. Manufacturer’s certification of concrete pavers by ICPI as having met applicable ASTM standards.

5. Manufacturer’s catalog product data, installation instructions, and material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified materials and products.

E. Paver Installation:

1. A copy of Subcontractor’s current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.

2. Job references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and email address.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers packaging with identification labels intact.

1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving.

2. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped packaging capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.

3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected such that they are kept free from mud, dirt, and other foreign materials. Store concrete paver cleaners and sealers per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Cover bedding sand and joint sand with waterproof covering if needed to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. Secure the covering in place.

SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain

2. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials.

3. Do not install frozen sand or saturated sand.

4. Do not install concrete pavers on frozen or saturated sand.

1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide 10% additional material for use by owner for maintenance and repair.

B. Extra material pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Manufacturer:

Hanover Architectural Products or approved equal

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
a. Substitutes must be approved a minimum of 10 days prior to the date of the bid opening. The City will issue an addendum, stating that an alternate product or manufacturer is acceptable. An alternate product or manufacture will not be accepted without issuing a formal addendum.

Alternate suppliers shall meet the requirements of the specified product and shall provide proof of equivalency.
b. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. Any costs and expenses associated with an approved substitution which affects other items of work, shall be sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2.3 JOINT SAND
A. Provide bedding and joint sand as follows:

SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Surebond joint stabilizing sealer SB-1300 or approved equal.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions:

1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept, and certify in writing to the paver installation subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to installation of interlocking concrete pavers. a. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to specified requirements.
b. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to drawings and specifications.
c. Verify that Aggregate base materials, thickness, compacted density, surface tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements. d. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade, aggregate base materials to the Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor.
e. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, concrete collars around curbs.

2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding sand and concrete pavers until subgrade soil and base conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated subcontractor.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify base is dry, certified by General Contractor as meeting material, installation, and grade specifications.

B. Verify that base is ready to support pavers and imposed loads.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Pavers in ¾” bed of sharp sand (conforming to ASTMC-33) applied over concrete slab base per plan detail/manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Do not use bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface.

B. Lay pavers in pattern shown on drawings. Place units’ hand tight without using hammers. Make horizontal adjustments to placement of laid pavers with rubber hammers and pry bars as required.

C. Provide joints between pavers between 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. wide. No more than 5% of the joints shall exceed 1/4 in. wide to achieve straight bond lines.

SECTION 32 1413

CONCRETE PAVERS
MILLS PARK 32 1413 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Joint (bond) lines shall not deviate more than ±1/2 in. over 50 ft. from string lines.

E. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units.

F. All pavers requiring cutting will be cut using either a table or handheld quick saw equipped with a masonry blade in order to achieve a straight and uniform cut edge, or along a curve. Pavers modified using a hammer or chisel will not be permitted.

G. Cut pavers to fit within limits of walks and service road as indicated on the drawings.

H. Keep skid steer and forklift equipment off newly laid pavers that have not received initial compaction and joint sand.

I. Spread, sweep, and compact dry joint sand into joints continuously per manufacturer’s instructions.

J. Remove excess sand from surface when installation is complete.

M. Allow excess joint sand to remain on surface to protect pavers from damage from other trades. Remove excess sand when directed by Engineer.

N. Surface shall be broom clean after removal of excess joint sand.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The final surface tolerance from grade elevations shall not deviate more than ±฀3/8 in. under a 10 ft straightedge.

B. Check final surface elevations for conformance to drawings.

C. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars, or channels.

D. Lippage: No greater than 1/16 in. difference in height between adjacent pavers.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. After work in this section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 3119

METAL FENCING
MILLS PARK 32 3119 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and all necessary items for the installation of metal fencing specified in the project plans and specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Section 03 3053 – Miscellaneous Concrete

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The manufacturer shall supply a total ornamental aluminum fencing system. The system shall include all components (i.e., pickets, posts, rails, gates, and hardware) required.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials specified.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.

D. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.

E. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

F. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

G. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

H. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

I. ASTM D6695 – Standard Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings
J. IBC 2018 1607.8.1 Handrails and Guards
SECTION 32 3119

METAL FENCING
MILLS PARK 32 3119 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. The manufacturer's submittal package shall be submitted prior to installation to confirm compliance with all requirements for materials specified in this section.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damages occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. The ornamental fence system shall be Echelon Plus 4-1/2’ tall 3 Rail Majestic manufactured by Ameristar Perimeter Security USA Inc. or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIAL
A. Aluminum material for fence framework (i.e., tubular pickets, rails and posts) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B221. The aluminum extrusions for posts and rails shall be Alloy and Temper Designation 6005-T5. The aluminum extrusions for pickets shall be Alloy and Temper Designation 6063-T52.

B. Pickets shall be 3/4" square x .045" thick. Horizontal rails shall be 1-1/4" x 1- 7/16" Forerunner™ profile with .090" top wall, .060" internal web, and .110" side wall
s. Forerunner rails shall be punched to accept pickets. The rail shall be constructed with an internal web providing a raceway for the pickets to be retained with a 1/8” retaining rod. The number of rails shall vary with the style, height and strength as determined by manufacturer. Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1.

C. Accessories: Aluminum castings shall be used for all post caps, scrolls, finials, and other miscellaneous hardware. Hinges and latches shall be fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel or composite materials.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. ForeRunner rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets. Grommets shall be inserted into the pre- punched holes in the rails and pickets shall be inserted through the grommets so that pre-drilled picket holes align with the internal upper raceway of the ForeRunner rails (Note: This can best be accomplished by using an alignment template). Retaining rods shall be inserted into each ForeRunner rail so that SECTION 32 3119

METAL FENCING
MILLS PARK 32 3119 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
they pass through the pre-drilled holes in each picket, thus completing the panel assembly. Panels without rings shall be biasable up to a 12% change in grade.

B. The manufactured framework shall be subjected to a thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, and multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pretreatment/wash and an electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, or White). The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2.

Carson City CouncilJune 17, 2025

Carson City Council
June 17, 2025